1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures true
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 0
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 0
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 0
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes true
144 \output_changes false
148 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
149 \author 274215730 "scott"
150 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
161 by the \SpecialChar LyX
166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
168 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
169 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
170 Documentation mailing list:
171 \begin_inset CommandInset href
173 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
185 \begin_inset Newline newline
189 \begin_inset Newline newline
193 \begin_inset Note Note
196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
197 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
198 \begin_inset Newline newline
203 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
204 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
212 \begin_layout Standard
213 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
214 LatexCommand tableofcontents
221 \begin_layout Chapter
225 \begin_layout Section
226 What is \SpecialChar LyX
230 \begin_layout Standard
232 is a document preparation system.
233 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
234 scripts, publishable books, business
235 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
236 It is unlike most other
237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
244 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
246 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
251 \begin_inset Quotes erd
255 \begin_inset Quotes eld
259 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 pt type, left justified, 5
263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
272 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
276 \begin_layout Standard
277 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
282 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
286 \begin_layout Standard
291 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
292 's philosophy: most importantly,
293 the format of all of the manuals.
294 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
295 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
301 manual describes that, too.
304 \begin_layout Section
309 \begin_layout Standard
310 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
311 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
313 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
314 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
318 \begin_layout Standard
319 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
320 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
321 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
323 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
324 only a vertical scrollbar.
325 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
326 The first case is large images.
327 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
328 image and use the option
339 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
342 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
343 this doesn't work for equations yet.
346 \begin_layout Standard
347 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
348 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
356 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
363 \begin_layout Section
367 \begin_layout Standard
368 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
370 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
372 Just select the manual you want to read from the
379 \begin_layout Section
380 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
382 \begin_inset CommandInset label
384 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
391 \begin_layout Standard
392 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
393 can be configured via the menu
395 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
399 \begin_inset Index idx
402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
409 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
411 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
412 packages are available.
413 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
415 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
417 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
422 \begin_inset space \space{}
425 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
426 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
428 To force \SpecialChar LyX
429 to re-inspect your system, you should use
431 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
435 \begin_inset Index idx
438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
439 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
445 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
446 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
449 \begin_layout Section
452 \begin_inset CommandInset label
454 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
461 \begin_layout Standard
462 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
463 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
464 installed, but you will not be
465 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
466 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
467 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
468 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
469 document can always be output as plain text
473 \begin_layout Standard
474 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
475 or DocBook classes or packages.
476 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
477 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
480 \begin_layout Standard
481 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
482 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
483 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
486 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
494 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
495 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
498 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
502 \begin_inset Index idx
505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
506 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
514 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
521 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
525 \begin_layout Chapter
526 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
530 \begin_layout Section
531 Basic File Operations
532 \begin_inset Index idx
535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
544 \begin_layout Standard
549 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
550 in addition to some more advanced operations:
553 \begin_layout Itemize
575 \begin_layout Itemize
591 arg "buffer-new-template"
597 \begin_layout Itemize
619 \begin_layout Itemize
629 \begin_layout Itemize
643 \begin_layout Itemize
665 \begin_layout Itemize
677 arg "buffer-write-as"
683 \begin_layout Itemize
697 \begin_layout Itemize
711 \begin_layout Standard
712 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
713 a few minor differences.
716 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
727 command lists the available templates.
728 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
729 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
730 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
738 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
745 \begin_layout Standard
746 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
755 \begin_inset Quotes eld
759 \begin_inset Quotes erd
763 \begin_inset Quotes eld
767 \begin_inset Quotes erd
771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
778 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
779 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
780 is just that — a big, blank space.
788 \begin_layout Standard
809 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
814 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
817 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
835 will reload the document from disk.
836 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
837 and want to restore it to the last save.
846 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
847 them as your changes.
850 \begin_layout Section
851 Basic Editing Features
852 \begin_inset Index idx
855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
864 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
871 \begin_layout Standard
872 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
873 can perform cut and paste operations
874 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
875 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
876 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
877 editing features and how to access
879 We will start with cut and paste.
882 \begin_layout Standard
883 As you might expect, the
887 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
888 various other editing features.
889 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
893 \begin_layout Itemize
899 \begin_inset Index idx
902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
931 \begin_layout Itemize
937 \begin_inset Index idx
940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
969 \begin_layout Itemize
975 \begin_inset Index idx
978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1003 \begin_layout Itemize
1007 \begin_inset space ~
1013 \begin_layout Itemize
1017 \begin_inset space ~
1023 \begin_layout Itemize
1027 \begin_inset space ~
1031 \begin_inset space ~
1037 \begin_inset Index idx
1040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1049 \begin_inset Index idx
1052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1067 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1077 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1083 \begin_layout Standard
1084 The first three are self-explanatory.
1085 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1086 and other programs by
1107 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1108 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1113 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1114 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1115 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1116 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1117 into individual cells.
1121 \begin_inset space ~
1126 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1127 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1131 \begin_layout Standard
1135 \begin_inset space ~
1140 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1142 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1157 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1158 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1159 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1161 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1165 \begin_inset space \space{}
1168 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1169 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1175 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1177 \begin_inset space ~
1181 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1185 \begin_inset space ~
1194 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1195 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1197 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1201 \begin_inset space ~
1206 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1207 start a new paragraph.
1208 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1209 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1214 \begin_inset space ~
1217 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1223 \begin_inset space ~
1231 \begin_inset space ~
1234 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1237 paste from the primary selection.
1238 This is normally the currently selected text.
1241 \begin_layout Standard
1244 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1246 \begin_inset space ~
1250 \begin_inset space ~
1258 \begin_inset space ~
1262 \begin_inset space ~
1268 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1274 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1277 \begin_inset space ~
1286 \begin_inset space ~
1291 button to skip the current word.
1295 \begin_inset space ~
1300 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1304 \begin_inset space ~
1309 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1311 If the toggle is set, searching for
1312 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1323 will not match the word
1324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1338 Match whole words only
1340 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1341 to only find complete words, e.
1342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1371 offers also an advanced
1374 \begin_inset space ~
1378 \begin_inset space ~
1383 feature that is described in section
1384 \begin_inset space ~
1388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1390 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1397 \begin_layout Standard
1398 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1399 \begin_inset space \space{}
1403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1411 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1413 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1418 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1425 \begin_layout Standard
1429 arg "inset-select-all"
1432 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1433 When the cursor is inside an inset
1436 arg "inset-select-all"
1439 selects the content of the inset.
1443 arg "inset-select-all"
1446 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1451 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1454 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1458 \begin_layout Section
1460 \begin_inset Index idx
1463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1470 \begin_inset Index idx
1473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1480 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1482 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1489 \begin_layout Standard
1490 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1492 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1495 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1498 or the toolbar button
1504 to undo some mistake.
1505 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1507 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1510 or the toolbar button
1517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1524 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1525 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1528 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1531 \begin_layout Standard
1532 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1541 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1542 This is a consequence of the 100
1543 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1546 step undo limit mentioned above.
1549 \begin_layout Standard
1558 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1560 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1564 \begin_layout Section
1566 \begin_inset Index idx
1569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1578 \begin_layout Standard
1579 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1582 \begin_layout Enumerate
1587 \begin_layout Itemize
1592 once anywhere in the edit window.
1593 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1597 \begin_layout Enumerate
1602 \begin_layout Itemize
1609 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1612 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1615 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1616 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1619 \begin_layout Itemize
1620 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1623 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1630 \begin_layout Enumerate
1631 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1635 \begin_layout Standard
1636 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1637 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1641 \begin_layout Section
1643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1645 name "sec:Navigating"
1650 \begin_inset Index idx
1653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1662 \begin_layout Standard
1664 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1667 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1673 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1676 \begin_layout Itemize
1677 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1679 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1681 \begin_inset space ~
1686 or by the toolbar button
1689 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1695 \begin_layout Itemize
1696 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1698 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1701 and use the same menu to return to them.
1702 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1705 \begin_layout Standard
1709 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1714 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1715 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1717 \begin_inset space ~
1722 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1723 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1724 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1725 your last editing position.
1728 \begin_layout Standard
1733 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1737 \begin_layout Subsection
1739 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1741 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1746 \begin_inset Index idx
1749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1750 Navigating ! Outline
1756 \begin_inset Index idx
1759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1768 \begin_layout Standard
1769 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1770 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1771 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1773 \begin_inset space ~
1777 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1779 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1783 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1784 \begin_inset space ~
1788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1790 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1795 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1799 \begin_layout Standard
1800 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1801 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1802 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1803 dialog and to modify the citation.
1806 \begin_layout Standard
1811 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1812 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1814 Labels and References
1816 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1825 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1828 \begin_layout Standard
1829 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1830 you further to control the display.
1835 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1836 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1842 option keeps it in the current view state.
1843 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1844 \begin_inset space ~
1847 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1848 \begin_inset space ~
1851 3, the subsections of sections
1852 \begin_inset space ~
1855 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1860 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1861 \begin_inset space ~
1865 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1867 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1871 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1875 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1878 \begin_layout Standard
1885 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1886 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1900 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1901 So, for example, you can move section
1902 \begin_inset space ~
1906 \begin_inset space ~
1909 2.4 or after section
1910 \begin_inset space ~
1915 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1928 (or the corresponding key bindings
1936 ) you can change the level of sections.
1937 So you can for example make section
1938 \begin_inset space ~
1942 \begin_inset space ~
1946 \begin_inset space ~
1952 \begin_layout Standard
1953 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1954 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1957 \begin_layout Subsection
1958 Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_inset Index idx
1962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1963 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1971 \begin_layout Standard
1973 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1979 \begin_inset space \space{}
1983 \begin_inset space ~
1986 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1987 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1988 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1992 \begin_layout Standard
1993 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1997 \begin_layout Itemize
1999 is used on a small tablet computer
2002 \begin_layout Itemize
2003 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2015 \begin_inset space ~
2028 \begin_layout Itemize
2029 Math constructs with long command names
2032 \begin_layout Standard
2033 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2034 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2036 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2037 windows so that table
2038 \begin_inset space ~
2042 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2044 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2049 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2051 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2052 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2055 \begin_layout Standard
2056 \begin_inset Float table
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2066 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2068 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2072 Horizontal scrolling test.
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2082 \begin_inset Tabular
2083 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2084 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2085 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2087 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2107 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2129 \begin_layout Section
2130 Input/Word Completion
2131 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2133 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2138 \begin_inset Index idx
2141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2148 \begin_inset Index idx
2151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2182 \begin_layout Standard
2184 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2186 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2187 is used to propose completions.
2190 \begin_layout Standard
2191 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2194 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2199 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2206 \begin_inset space ~
2210 \begin_inset space ~
2215 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2219 \begin_inset space ~
2224 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2225 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2229 \begin_inset space ~
2235 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2236 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2237 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2238 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2241 \begin_layout Standard
2243 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2244 completions available.
2249 key to accept a proposed completion.
2250 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2251 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2252 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2259 \begin_layout Standard
2260 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2261 ing options for text.
2262 The special math option
2266 enables characters to be composed.
2267 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2268 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2271 , you can then input the characters
2272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2280 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2283 to a formula to get it.
2284 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2285 of the math toolbar.
2286 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2290 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2291 's installation folder.
2292 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2301 \begin_layout Section
2303 \begin_inset Index idx
2306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2313 \begin_inset Index idx
2316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2345 \begin_inset Index idx
2348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2379 \begin_layout Standard
2380 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2394 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2397 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2401 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2402 \begin_inset space ~
2406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2408 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2415 \begin_layout Standard
2419 \begin_inset space ~
2427 \begin_inset space ~
2448 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2452 \begin_layout Labeling
2453 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2457 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2458 LatexCommand nomenclature
2460 description "Tabulator key"
2467 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2469 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2470 \begin_inset space ~
2474 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2476 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2481 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2483 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2487 , especially section
2488 \begin_inset space ~
2492 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2494 reference "subsec:Lists"
2500 If you are still confused, look in the
2505 \begin_inset Newline newline
2513 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2514 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2518 \begin_layout Labeling
2519 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2523 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2524 LatexCommand nomenclature
2526 description "Escape key"
2534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2538 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2541 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2542 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2545 \begin_layout Labeling
2546 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2552 \begin_inset space ~
2556 \begin_inset space ~
2563 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2564 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2568 \begin_layout Standard
2569 There are three modifier keys:
2572 \begin_layout Labeling
2573 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2579 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2587 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2591 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2592 LatexCommand nomenclature
2594 description "Control key"
2599 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2600 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2604 \begin_layout Itemize
2613 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2616 \begin_layout Itemize
2625 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2628 \begin_layout Itemize
2637 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2641 \begin_layout Labeling
2642 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2656 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2660 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2661 LatexCommand nomenclature
2663 description "Shift key"
2668 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2669 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2672 \begin_layout Labeling
2673 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2691 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2692 LatexCommand nomenclature
2694 description "Alt or Meta key"
2699 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2700 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2701 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2707 \begin_inset Newline newline
2710 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2712 menu accelerator keys
2715 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2716 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2720 \begin_layout Standard
2721 For example, the sequence
2722 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2728 \begin_inset space ~
2732 \begin_inset space ~
2738 \begin_inset space ~
2746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2765 \begin_inset space ~
2771 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2781 \begin_layout Standard
2786 manual lists all other things bound to the
2794 \begin_layout Standard
2795 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2797 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2798 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2799 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2800 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2801 The \SpecialChar LyX
2802 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2803 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2804 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2806 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2807 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2822 followed by a capital
2829 \begin_layout Chapter
2832 \begin_inset Index idx
2835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2845 \begin_layout Section
2847 \begin_inset Index idx
2850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2859 \begin_layout Subsection
2863 \begin_layout Standard
2864 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2865 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2866 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2867 numbering schemes, and so on.
2868 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2869 and format the title of your document differently.
2872 \begin_layout Standard
2877 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2878 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2879 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2880 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2881 picks one for you by default.
2882 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2885 \begin_layout Subsection
2887 \begin_inset Index idx
2890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2897 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2899 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2906 \begin_layout Standard
2907 You can select a class using the
2909 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2910 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2914 \begin_inset Index idx
2917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2924 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2928 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2932 \begin_layout Standard
2933 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2938 \begin_layout Description
2939 Article for basic articles
2942 \begin_layout Description
2943 Report for basic reports
2946 \begin_layout Description
2947 Book for writing a book
2950 \begin_layout Description
2951 Letter for US-style letters
2954 \begin_layout Standard
2955 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2956 only uses if you have installed
2957 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2958 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2959 distributions will include
2961 Here are some of the classes.
2962 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2964 Special Document Classes
2973 \begin_layout Description
2974 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2977 \begin_layout Description
2978 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2982 \begin_layout Description
2983 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2987 \begin_layout Description
2988 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2989 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2990 There are three article layouts available.
2991 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2992 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2993 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2994 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2999 sequential numbering
3000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3003 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3004 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3005 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3006 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3009 \begin_layout Description
3010 Beamer Layout for presentations
3013 \begin_layout Description
3014 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3015 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3016 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3017 with \SpecialChar LyX
3021 \begin_layout Description
3022 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3025 \begin_layout Description
3027 \begin_inset space ~
3030 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3033 \begin_layout Description
3034 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 Foils Used to make transparencies
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3043 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3044 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3045 with \SpecialChar LyX
3049 \begin_layout Description
3050 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3051 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3054 \begin_layout Description
3055 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3058 \begin_layout Description
3059 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3062 \begin_layout Description
3063 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3064 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3065 (Is used by this document.)
3068 \begin_layout Description
3069 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3072 \begin_layout Description
3073 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3076 \begin_layout Description
3081 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3082 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3084 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3088 \begin_layout Description
3089 Slides Used to make transparencies
3092 \begin_layout Description
3094 \begin_inset space ~
3097 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3098 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3101 \begin_layout Description
3102 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3105 \begin_layout Standard
3106 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3108 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3110 Special Document Classes
3117 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3118 of the document classes.
3121 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3125 \begin_layout Standard
3126 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3128 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3129 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3131 \begin_inset Index idx
3134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3151 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3152 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3154 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3157 \begin_layout Standard
3160 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3165 , are highly specialized.
3167 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3168 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3169 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3170 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3171 by some document class.
3172 There are just too many of them.
3173 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3176 \begin_layout Standard
3177 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3185 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3186 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3187 document class for a new file.
3189 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3192 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3199 manual for information on how to install them.
3200 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3206 \begin_layout Standard
3207 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3208 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3209 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3210 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3211 class files to be used for dissertation
3212 s submitted to those universities.
3213 The \SpecialChar LyX
3214 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3216 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3220 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3226 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3229 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3233 name "subsec:Modules"
3238 \begin_inset Index idx
3241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3250 \begin_layout Standard
3251 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3252 chosen document class.
3253 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3254 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3261 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3265 \begin_inset Index idx
3268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3275 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3279 \begin_layout Standard
3280 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3281 packages or file format converters that are not always
3282 installed by default.
3284 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3285 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3286 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3287 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3289 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3290 file without the missing prerequisites.
3291 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3292 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3295 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3299 \begin_inset Index idx
3302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3303 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3309 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3314 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3317 \begin_layout Standard
3318 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3326 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3328 will advise you about these things.
3336 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3338 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3340 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3345 \begin_inset Index idx
3348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3349 Document ! Local Layout
3357 \begin_layout Standard
3358 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3359 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3360 : They are intended to be used in
3361 a variety of different documents.
3362 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3363 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3364 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3365 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3366 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3368 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3370 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3386 manual for information on how to use it.
3389 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3393 \begin_layout Standard
3394 Each class has a default set of options.
3395 Here's a quick table describing them:
3398 \begin_layout Standard
3399 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3405 \begin_layout Standard
3407 \begin_inset Tabular
3408 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3409 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3412 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3414 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3516 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3552 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3868 \begin_layout Standard
3869 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3875 \begin_layout Standard
3876 You're probably also wondering what
3877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3881 \begin_inset space ~
3885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3889 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3890 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3895 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3900 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3910 headings, there are also
3918 headings, and so on.
3919 We will describe these headings fully in section
3920 \begin_inset space ~
3924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3926 reference "subsec:Headings"
3933 \begin_layout Subsection
3935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3937 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3942 \begin_inset Index idx
3945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3952 \begin_inset Index idx
3955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Standard
3965 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3967 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3974 \begin_inset space ~
3982 \begin_inset space ~
3987 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3989 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3990 doesn't support special options you want to
3991 use for your document.
3992 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3993 -class and its options, you have to read
3997 \begin_layout Standard
4001 \begin_inset space ~
4008 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4014 \begin_inset space ~
4019 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4020 You can choose between the following five options:
4023 \begin_layout Labeling
4024 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4029 Use default page style of current class.
4032 \begin_layout Labeling
4033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4038 No page numbers or headings.
4041 \begin_layout Labeling
4042 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4050 \begin_layout Labeling
4051 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4056 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4057 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4058 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4059 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4062 \begin_layout Labeling
4063 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4068 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4069 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4075 \begin_inset Index idx
4078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4080 -packages ! fancyhdr
4086 How they are defined is explained in section
4087 \begin_inset space ~
4091 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4093 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4100 \begin_layout Standard
4101 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4102 \begin_inset space ~
4106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4108 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4115 \begin_layout Subsection
4116 Paper Size and Orientation
4117 \begin_inset Index idx
4120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4121 Document ! Paper size
4127 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4129 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4136 \begin_layout Standard
4137 You can find the following options in the menu
4140 \begin_inset space ~
4147 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4151 \begin_inset Index idx
4154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4163 \begin_layout Labeling
4164 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4168 \begin_inset space ~
4173 What size paper to print on.
4178 \begin_layout Itemize
4184 \begin_layout Itemize
4190 \begin_layout Itemize
4196 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 \begin_layout Itemize
4205 US letter, US legal, US executive
4208 \begin_layout Itemize
4214 \begin_layout Itemize
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4227 To choose whether to output as
4238 \begin_layout Labeling
4239 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4243 \begin_inset space ~
4248 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4249 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4252 \begin_layout Subsection
4254 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4256 name "subsec:Margins"
4261 \begin_inset Index idx
4264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4271 \begin_inset Index idx
4274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4283 \begin_layout Standard
4284 Paper margins are set in the menu
4286 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4290 \begin_inset Index idx
4293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4302 \begin_layout Standard
4303 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4304 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4305 the paper format and the font size into account.
4308 \begin_layout Subsection
4312 \begin_layout Standard
4313 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4319 That includes the paragraph environments.
4320 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4321 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4322 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4324 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4325 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4333 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4335 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4336 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4337 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4340 \begin_layout Section
4341 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4342 \begin_inset Index idx
4345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4346 Paragraph ! Indentation
4354 \begin_layout Subsection
4356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4358 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4365 \begin_layout Standard
4366 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4367 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4370 \begin_layout Standard
4371 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4372 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4373 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4374 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4378 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4384 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4385 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4386 language than English.
4388 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4391 \begin_layout Standard
4392 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4393 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4394 into \SpecialChar LyX
4396 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4399 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4401 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4402 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4403 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4410 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4411 goes to produce a printable file.
4416 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4418 gives you the ability globally to change
4422 these pre-coded spacings.
4423 We will explain more later.
4426 \begin_layout Subsection
4427 Paragraph Separation
4428 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4430 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4435 \begin_inset Index idx
4438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4439 Paragraph ! Separation
4447 \begin_layout Standard
4455 \begin_inset space ~
4463 \begin_inset space ~
4470 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4474 \begin_inset Index idx
4477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4483 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4486 \begin_layout Subsection
4490 \begin_layout Standard
4491 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4494 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4496 \begin_inset space ~
4501 dialog and toggle the
4504 \begin_inset space ~
4509 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4512 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4516 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4517 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4521 \begin_layout Standard
4522 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4523 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4526 \begin_layout Subsection
4528 \begin_inset Index idx
4531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4532 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4540 \begin_layout Standard
4543 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4547 \begin_inset Index idx
4550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4559 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4563 \begin_inset space ~
4572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4573 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4579 \begin_inset Index idx
4582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4584 -packages ! setspace
4589 installed to use this feature.
4594 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4598 \begin_inset space ~
4603 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4604 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4607 \begin_layout Section
4608 Paragraph Environments
4609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4611 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4616 \begin_inset Index idx
4619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4620 Paragraph ! Environments
4626 \begin_inset Index idx
4629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4630 Paragraph environments|(
4638 \begin_layout Subsection
4642 \begin_layout Standard
4643 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4646 \begin_layout Standard
4655 } \SpecialChar ldots
4665 \begin_inset Newline newline
4668 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4670 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4671 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4672 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4681 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4684 \begin_layout Standard
4685 A paragraph environment is simply a
4686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4693 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4694 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4695 scheme, labels, and so on.
4696 Additionally, you can
4697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4704 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4705 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4706 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4707 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4709 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4711 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4714 \begin_layout Standard
4715 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4716 \begin_inset Graphics
4717 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4723 at the left end of the toolbar.
4725 will change the environment of the
4729 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4730 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4731 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4735 \begin_layout Standard
4744 create a new paragraph using the
4748 paragraph environment.
4750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4757 because if you are in one of these environments:
4760 \begin_layout Itemize
4766 \begin_layout Itemize
4772 \begin_layout Itemize
4778 \begin_layout Itemize
4784 \begin_layout Itemize
4790 \begin_layout Itemize
4796 \begin_layout Itemize
4802 \begin_layout Standard
4804 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4808 , rather than resetting it to
4813 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4814 \begin_inset space ~
4818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4820 reference "sec:Nesting"
4827 \begin_layout Subsection
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 The default paragraph environment is
4837 It creates a plain paragraph.
4839 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4840 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4841 this manual) are in the
4848 \begin_layout Standard
4849 You can nest a paragraph using the
4853 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4861 \begin_layout Subsection
4863 \begin_inset Index idx
4866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4875 \begin_layout Standard
4876 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4877 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4886 for thanks or contact information.
4887 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4888 places all of this on a separate page
4889 along with today's date.
4890 For other types of documents, the title
4891 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4895 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4898 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4902 \begin_layout Standard
4904 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4918 Here's how you use them:
4921 \begin_layout Itemize
4922 Put the title of your document in the
4929 \begin_layout Itemize
4930 Put the author name in the
4937 \begin_layout Itemize
4938 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4939 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4945 Note that using this environment is optional.
4946 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4947 will automatically insert today's date.
4948 If you don't want a date, use the option
4950 Suppress default date on front page
4954 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4955 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4957 \begin_inset space ~
4965 \begin_layout Standard
4966 You can use footnotes to insert
4967 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4971 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4974 or contact information.
4977 \begin_layout Subsection
4979 \begin_inset Index idx
4982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4989 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4991 name "subsec:Headings"
4998 \begin_layout Standard
4999 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
5001 takes care of the numbering for you.
5004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5006 \begin_inset Index idx
5009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5010 Section headings ! Numbered
5018 \begin_layout Standard
5019 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5023 \begin_layout Enumerate
5029 \begin_layout Enumerate
5035 \begin_layout Enumerate
5041 \begin_layout Enumerate
5047 \begin_layout Enumerate
5053 \begin_layout Enumerate
5059 \begin_layout Enumerate
5065 \begin_layout Standard
5067 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5068 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5069 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5072 \begin_layout Standard
5073 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5074 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5075 You group the book into chapters.
5077 does a similar grouping:
5080 \begin_layout Itemize
5085 is divided into either
5096 \begin_layout Itemize
5108 \begin_layout Itemize
5120 \begin_layout Itemize
5132 \begin_layout Itemize
5144 \begin_layout Itemize
5156 \begin_layout Standard
5157 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5165 Not all document types use the
5169 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5174 is the top-level heading.
5182 \begin_layout Standard
5187 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5188 labels it with its number,
5189 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5191 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5203 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5205 \begin_inset Index idx
5208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5209 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5217 \begin_layout Standard
5218 The unnumbered section headings have a
5219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5226 at the end of their name.
5227 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5228 the table of contents, see section
5229 \begin_inset space ~
5233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5243 Changing the Numbering
5244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5246 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5253 \begin_layout Standard
5254 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5255 in the Table of Contents.
5256 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5258 Just as certain classes start with
5272 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5282 This is something you can change.
5285 \begin_layout Standard
5288 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5292 \begin_inset Index idx
5295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5304 \begin_inset space ~
5308 \begin_inset space ~
5313 you will see two counters.
5318 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5319 numbers a section heading.
5320 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5325 Short Titles of Headings
5326 \begin_inset Index idx
5329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5330 Section headings ! Short titles
5336 \begin_inset Argument 1
5339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5346 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5348 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5355 \begin_layout Standard
5356 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5357 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5358 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5359 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5362 \begin_layout Standard
5364 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5365 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5366 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5367 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5370 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5372 \begin_inset space ~
5378 This will insert a box labeled
5379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5383 \begin_inset space ~
5387 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5390 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5391 This also works for captions inside floats.
5392 There can only be one short title per title.
5395 \begin_layout Standard
5396 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5399 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5403 \begin_layout Standard
5404 The following information applies to all section headings:
5407 \begin_layout Itemize
5408 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5411 \begin_layout Itemize
5412 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5415 \begin_layout Itemize
5416 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5419 \begin_layout Itemize
5420 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5423 \begin_layout Subsection
5427 \begin_layout Standard
5429 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5443 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5444 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5445 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5446 the text they contain.
5447 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5455 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5458 \begin_layout Standard
5459 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5468 when you start a new paragraph.
5469 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5473 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5474 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5475 have to change back to the
5479 environment yourself.
5482 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5484 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5491 \begin_inset Index idx
5494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5503 \begin_layout Standard
5504 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5505 time for the differences.
5514 are identical except for one difference:
5518 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5527 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5530 \begin_layout Standard
5531 Here's an example of the
5544 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5546 See – no indentation!
5550 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5551 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5552 the other paragraph.
5555 \begin_layout Standard
5556 Here's another example, this time in the
5563 \begin_layout Quotation
5569 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5570 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5571 the first line, then
5575 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5579 you were quoting other text.
5582 \begin_layout Quotation
5583 Here's a new paragraph.
5584 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5585 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5588 \begin_layout Standard
5589 As the examples show,
5593 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5594 They should put quotes in the
5599 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5603 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5606 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5608 \begin_inset Index idx
5611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5618 \begin_inset Index idx
5621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5628 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5637 \begin_layout Standard
5642 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5648 \begin_inset Newline newline
5651 Which I did not rehearse!
5655 It could be much worse.
5656 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5658 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5659 indented a bit more than the first.
5660 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5666 \begin_inset Newline newline
5669 And make things look fine
5670 \begin_inset Newline newline
5676 arg "newline-insert newline"
5682 \begin_layout Standard
5687 does not indent both margins.
5688 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5689 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5692 arg "newline-insert newline"
5698 \begin_layout Subsection
5700 \begin_inset Index idx
5703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5719 \begin_layout Standard
5721 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5731 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5732 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5741 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5742 lets you provide your own label.
5743 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5744 describing some general features of all four of them.
5747 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5751 \begin_layout Standard
5752 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5754 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5755 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5764 reset the environment to
5768 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5769 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5770 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5778 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5785 \begin_layout Standard
5786 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5787 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5788 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5790 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5791 you read all of section
5792 \begin_inset space ~
5796 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5798 reference "sec:Nesting"
5805 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5807 \begin_inset Index idx
5810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5817 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5826 \begin_layout Standard
5827 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5831 paragraph environment.
5832 It has the following properties:
5835 \begin_layout Itemize
5836 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5840 \begin_layout Itemize
5842 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5845 \begin_layout Itemize
5846 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5850 \begin_layout Itemize
5851 The items can have any length.
5853 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5854 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5866 environment inside another
5870 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5874 \begin_layout Itemize
5875 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5878 \begin_layout Itemize
5880 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5883 \begin_layout Itemize
5885 \begin_inset space ~
5889 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5891 reference "sec:Nesting"
5895 for a full explanation of nesting.
5899 \begin_layout Standard
5900 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5909 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5912 \begin_layout Standard
5913 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5914 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5917 \begin_layout Itemize
5918 The label for the first level
5922 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5926 \begin_layout Itemize
5927 The label for the second level is a dash.
5931 \begin_layout Itemize
5932 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5936 \begin_layout Itemize
5937 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5941 \begin_layout Itemize
5942 Back out to the third level.
5946 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 Back to the second level.
5951 \begin_layout Itemize
5952 Back to the outermost level.
5955 \begin_layout Standard
5956 These are the default labels for an
5961 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5963 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5966 dialog in the submenu
5971 \begin_inset Index idx
5974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5980 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5984 \begin_layout Standard
5985 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5986 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5988 \begin_inset space ~
5992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5994 reference "sec:Nesting"
6001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6003 \begin_inset Index idx
6006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6015 name "sec:Enumerate"
6022 \begin_layout Standard
6027 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6028 It has these properties:
6031 \begin_layout Enumerate
6032 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6036 \begin_layout Enumerate
6037 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6041 \begin_layout Enumerate
6043 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6046 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 environment resets the counter to one.
6054 \begin_layout Enumerate
6067 \begin_layout Enumerate
6068 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6069 Items can have any length.
6072 \begin_layout Enumerate
6073 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6076 \begin_layout Enumerate
6077 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6080 \begin_layout Enumerate
6081 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6085 \begin_layout Standard
6094 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6096 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6097 labels the four different levels in an
6104 \begin_layout Enumerate
6105 The first level of an
6109 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6113 \begin_layout Enumerate
6114 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6118 \begin_layout Enumerate
6119 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6123 \begin_layout Enumerate
6124 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6127 \begin_layout Enumerate
6128 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6133 \begin_layout Enumerate
6134 Back to the third level
6138 \begin_layout Enumerate
6139 Back to the second level.
6143 \begin_layout Enumerate
6144 Back to the outermost level.
6147 \begin_layout Standard
6148 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6152 environment, see section
6153 \begin_inset space ~
6157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6159 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6164 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6168 \begin_layout Standard
6169 There is more to nesting
6173 environments than we've stated here.
6174 You should read section
6175 \begin_inset space ~
6179 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6181 reference "sec:Nesting"
6185 to learn more about nesting.
6188 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6190 \begin_inset Index idx
6193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6202 \begin_layout Standard
6203 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6207 list has no fixed label.
6208 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6217 of the first line as the label.
6221 \begin_layout Description
6222 Example: This is an example of the
6229 \begin_layout Standard
6231 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6235 \begin_layout Standard
6237 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6241 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6244 it is meant that the first usage of the
6248 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6250 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6258 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6264 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6266 \begin_inset space ~
6272 \begin_inset space ~
6276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6278 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6282 for more information.) Here is an example:
6285 \begin_layout Description
6287 \begin_inset space ~
6290 Example: This one shows how to use a
6293 \begin_inset space ~
6305 \begin_layout Description
6306 Usage: You should use the
6310 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6311 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6313 It's not a good idea to use a
6317 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6318 You're better off using
6330 paragraphs into them.
6333 \begin_layout Description
6334 Nesting: You can nest
6338 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6342 \begin_layout Standard
6343 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6344 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6345 them from the first line.
6348 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6350 \begin_inset Index idx
6353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6362 \begin_layout Standard
6367 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6368 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6372 \begin_layout Standard
6381 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6383 Here are its properties:
6386 \begin_layout Labeling
6387 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6389 \begin_inset space ~
6392 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6401 of each line as the item label.
6406 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6407 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6408 space as described above.
6411 \begin_layout Labeling
6412 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6413 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6414 uses different margins for the item label and the
6415 body of the item text.
6416 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6417 label width plus a little extra space.
6421 \begin_layout Labeling
6422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6424 \begin_inset space ~
6427 width \SpecialChar LyX
6428 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6429 If the label width is larger, the label
6430 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6434 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6437 into the first line.
6438 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6439 margin of the rest of the item text.
6442 \begin_layout Labeling
6443 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6448 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6453 environment has the same left margin.
6454 \begin_inset Newline newline
6457 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6460 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6462 \begin_inset space ~
6467 dialog (toolbar button
6470 arg "layout-paragraph"
6477 \begin_inset space ~
6482 determines the default label width.
6483 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6492 multiple times instead.
6493 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6496 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6503 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6506 \begin_inset space ~
6511 every time you alter a label in a
6516 \begin_inset Newline newline
6519 The predefined default width is the length of
6520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6528 \begin_inset space ~
6534 \begin_layout Standard
6539 list the same way as the
6543 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6549 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6553 \begin_layout Standard
6558 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6559 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6561 \begin_inset space ~
6565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6567 reference "sec:Nesting"
6571 to learn about nesting.
6574 \begin_layout Standard
6575 There is yet another feature of the
6579 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6580 left-justifies the item labels by
6582 You can use additional
6586 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6587 justifies the item label.
6592 are documented in section
6593 \begin_inset space ~
6597 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6599 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6604 Here are some examples:
6607 \begin_layout Labeling
6608 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6609 Left The default for
6616 \begin_layout Labeling
6617 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6618 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6625 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6628 \begin_layout Labeling
6629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6630 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6634 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6641 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6644 \begin_layout Subsection
6646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6648 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6653 \begin_inset Index idx
6656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 \begin_layout Standard
6666 The features described in this section require that the module
6668 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6670 is loaded in the document settings.
6671 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6677 \begin_inset Index idx
6680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6682 -packages ! enumitem
6690 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6691 Custom Enumerate Lists
6692 \begin_inset Index idx
6695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6696 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6704 \begin_layout Standard
6706 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6709 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6712 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6713 There you add the command
6716 \begin_layout Standard
6724 \begin_layout Standard
6736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6737 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6738 Code, look at section
6739 \begin_inset space ~
6743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6745 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6758 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6765 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6766 For capital Roman numerals replace
6778 in the command above.
6779 For Arabic numerals use
6787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6794 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6809 \begin_layout Standard
6811 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6819 You can only number 26
6820 \begin_inset space ~
6823 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6831 \begin_layout Standard
6832 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6833 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6836 \begin_layout Standard
6837 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6840 \begin_layout Enumerate
6841 \begin_inset Argument 1
6844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6870 \begin_layout Enumerate
6871 \begin_inset Argument 1
6874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6897 \begin_layout Enumerate
6902 \begin_layout Enumerate
6903 \begin_inset Argument 1
6906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6930 \begin_layout Enumerate
6931 \begin_inset Argument 1
6934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6960 \begin_layout Standard
6961 For this list these commands were used:
6964 \begin_layout Standard
6975 \begin_inset Newline newline
6983 \begin_inset Newline newline
6991 \begin_inset Newline newline
7001 \begin_layout Standard
7008 makes the label emphasized and
7017 \begin_layout Standard
7018 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7026 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7027 lists until you change the definition.
7035 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7037 \begin_inset Index idx
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7041 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7049 \begin_layout Standard
7050 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7053 \begin_layout Enumerate
7054 \begin_inset Argument 1
7057 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7076 \begin_inset Note Note
7079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7080 goes back to default numbering
7088 \begin_layout Enumerate
7092 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7100 \begin_layout Standard
7101 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7106 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7107 to indicate that it is a resumed
7108 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7109 , but in the output.
7112 \begin_layout Standard
7113 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7121 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7130 \begin_layout Standard
7131 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7133 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7134 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7135 of a normal enumeration.
7136 There, insert the command
7139 \begin_layout Standard
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7150 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7154 \begin_layout Enumerate
7158 \begin_layout Enumerate
7162 \begin_layout Standard
7163 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7166 \begin_layout Enumerate
7167 \begin_inset Argument 1
7170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 This enumeration starts at 4
7189 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7191 \begin_inset Index idx
7194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7203 \begin_layout Standard
7204 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7206 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7209 \begin_layout Itemize
7213 \begin_layout Itemize
7214 with standard spacing
7217 \begin_layout Standard
7218 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7220 Add there the command
7224 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7227 \begin_layout Itemize
7228 \begin_inset Argument 1
7231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7250 \begin_layout Itemize
7254 \begin_layout Itemize
7258 \begin_layout Standard
7259 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7266 \begin_inset Index idx
7269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7271 -packages ! enumitem
7277 For more information see its documentation,
7278 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7288 \begin_layout Standard
7289 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7291 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7292 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7296 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7299 \begin_layout Enumerate
7300 \begin_inset Argument 1
7303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7311 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7324 \begin_layout Enumerate
7325 with negative indentation
7328 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7329 Further Customization
7330 \begin_inset Index idx
7333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7334 Lists ! Customization
7342 \begin_layout Standard
7343 You can also change the style of description lists.
7347 \begin_layout Standard
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7354 changes the description label font, the command
7357 \begin_layout Standard
7363 \begin_layout Standard
7364 sets the list style.
7367 \begin_layout Standard
7368 An example where the command
7371 \begin_layout Standard
7376 itshape, style=nextline
7379 \begin_layout Standard
7383 \begin_layout Description
7385 \begin_inset space ~
7389 \begin_inset Argument 1
7392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7398 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7400 itshape, style=nextline
7410 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7411 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7415 \begin_layout Description
7417 \begin_inset space ~
7420 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7421 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7422 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7425 \begin_layout Standard
7426 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7432 \begin_inset Index idx
7435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7437 -packages ! enumitem
7443 For more information see its documentation
7444 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7454 \begin_layout Subsection
7456 \begin_inset Index idx
7459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7468 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7470 \begin_inset space ~
7473 Address: An Overview
7476 \begin_layout Standard
7477 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7478 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7486 \begin_inset space ~
7492 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7493 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7494 gags on the document.
7495 In contrast, you can use the
7502 \begin_inset space ~
7507 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7508 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7512 \begin_layout Standard
7513 Of course, you're not limited to using
7520 \begin_inset space ~
7529 \begin_inset space ~
7534 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7535 some European academic papers.
7538 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7540 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7542 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7549 \begin_layout Standard
7554 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7555 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7559 \begin_inset space ~
7564 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7565 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7566 Here's an example of each:
7569 \begin_layout Right Address
7571 \begin_inset Newline newline
7575 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 \begin_inset Newline newline
7582 When is it? What is today?
7585 \begin_layout Standard
7589 \begin_inset space ~
7595 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7597 the largest block of text on a single line.
7598 Here's an example of the
7605 \begin_layout Address
7607 \begin_inset Newline newline
7610 Where do I send this
7611 \begin_inset Newline newline
7614 Your post office and country
7617 \begin_layout Standard
7618 As you can see, both
7625 \begin_inset space ~
7630 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7635 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7636 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7642 This makes sense, since
7650 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7651 Thus, you have to use
7658 arg "newline-insert newline"
7663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7664 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7666 \begin_inset space ~
7670 \begin_inset space ~
7675 ) to start a new line in an
7682 \begin_inset space ~
7690 \begin_layout Subsection
7694 \begin_layout Standard
7695 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7696 or list of references.
7698 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7701 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7703 \begin_inset Index idx
7706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7715 \begin_layout Standard
7720 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7721 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7722 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7723 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7737 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7738 The book document classes ignores the
7742 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7746 in a letter document class.
7749 \begin_layout Standard
7754 environment does several things for you.
7755 First, it puts the centered label
7756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7760 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7764 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7766 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7767 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7768 the subsequent text.
7769 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7771 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7775 \begin_layout Standard
7776 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7780 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7781 The new paragraph will still be in the
7786 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7787 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7790 \begin_layout Standard
7791 \begin_inset Float figure
7796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7798 \begin_inset Graphics
7799 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7810 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7812 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7833 \begin_layout Standard
7834 We would love to demonstrate the
7838 environment, but since this document is in the
7839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7846 class, we can't do this.
7847 We inserted it therefore as figure
7848 \begin_inset space ~
7852 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7854 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7859 If you have never heard of an
7860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7867 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7870 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7872 \begin_inset Index idx
7875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7882 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7884 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7896 environment is used to list references.
7897 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7898 only use it at the end of the document.
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7911 When you first open a
7915 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7916 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7932 depending on the document class.
7933 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7934 Each paragraph of the
7938 environment is a bibliography entry.
7943 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7944 Each new paragraph is still in the
7951 \begin_layout Standard
7952 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7953 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7955 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7957 handling, have a look at section
7958 \begin_inset space ~
7962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7964 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7971 \begin_layout Subsection
7972 Special Environments
7975 \begin_layout Standard
7977 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7978 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7981 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7986 \begin_inset Index idx
7989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7997 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7999 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8006 \begin_layout Standard
8012 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8014 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8019 key as a fixed whitespace.
8023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8036 \begin_inset space ~
8041 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8059 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8062 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8065 arg "newline-insert newline"
8082 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8083 So, when you finish using the
8088 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8089 Also, you can nest the
8094 environment inside of others.
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8098 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8101 \begin_layout Itemize
8105 arg "newline-insert newline"
8108 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8109 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8113 \begin_inset space \space{}
8123 arg "newline-insert newline"
8129 \begin_layout Itemize
8133 arg "newline-insert newline"
8143 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8149 \begin_layout Itemize
8150 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8151 You must put at least one
8155 in any line you want blank.
8156 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8160 \begin_layout Itemize
8161 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8165 since that will insert
8170 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8173 arg "self-insert \""
8179 \begin_layout Standard
8183 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8187 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8191 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8195 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8199 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8200 printf("Hello World!
8205 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8209 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8213 \begin_layout Standard
8214 This is just the standard
8215 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8219 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8226 \begin_layout Standard
8232 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8234 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8235 as if you used a typewriter.
8236 \begin_inset Index idx
8239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8240 Paragraph environments|)
8245 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8248 Program Code Listings
8253 \begin_inset space ~
8261 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8265 \begin_inset Index idx
8268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8277 \begin_layout Standard
8282 environment is similar to the
8287 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8288 computer console text.
8293 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8307 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8308 you can have empty lines.
8321 \begin_layout Itemize
8322 have a certain language and a text style
8325 \begin_layout Itemize
8326 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8327 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8328 and \SpecialChar TeX
8332 \begin_layout Standard
8333 Because of these properties
8337 works like a typewriter.
8341 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 \begin_layout Verbatim
8348 The following 2 lines are empty:
8351 \begin_layout Verbatim
8355 \begin_layout Verbatim
8359 \begin_layout Verbatim
8360 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8365 \begin_layout Standard
8370 environment is identical to
8374 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8382 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8386 \begin_layout Section
8387 Nesting Environments
8388 \begin_inset Index idx
8391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8392 Nesting ! Environments
8398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8407 \begin_layout Subsection
8411 \begin_layout Standard
8413 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8415 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8417 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8419 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8425 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8431 \begin_layout Enumerate
8435 \begin_layout Enumerate
8440 \begin_layout Enumerate
8444 \begin_layout Enumerate
8449 \begin_layout Enumerate
8453 \begin_layout Standard
8454 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8455 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8459 \begin_inset space ~
8463 \begin_inset space ~
8471 \begin_inset space ~
8475 \begin_inset space ~
8480 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8482 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8485 arg "depth-increment"
8491 arg "depth-decrement"
8505 arg "depth-increment"
8511 arg "depth-decrement"
8515 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8516 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8520 \begin_layout Standard
8521 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8522 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8523 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8524 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8525 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8528 \begin_layout Standard
8529 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8531 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8533 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8536 \begin_layout Subsection
8537 What You Can and Can't Nest
8540 \begin_layout Standard
8541 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8542 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8545 \begin_layout Standard
8546 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8547 than a simple yes or no.
8548 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8551 \begin_layout Itemize
8552 Completely unnestable
8555 \begin_layout Itemize
8556 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8560 \begin_layout Itemize
8561 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8565 \begin_layout Standard
8566 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8567 environments have them:
8570 \begin_layout Description
8571 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8572 Can't nest into them.
8576 \begin_layout Itemize
8582 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Itemize
8594 \begin_layout Itemize
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8607 \begin_layout Description
8609 \begin_inset space ~
8612 Nestable You can nest them.
8613 You can nest other things into them.
8617 \begin_layout Itemize
8623 \begin_layout Itemize
8629 \begin_layout Itemize
8635 \begin_layout Itemize
8641 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8659 \begin_layout Itemize
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8679 \begin_layout Description
8680 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8681 You can't nest anything into them.
8685 \begin_layout Itemize
8691 \begin_layout Itemize
8697 \begin_layout Itemize
8703 \begin_layout Itemize
8709 \begin_layout Itemize
8715 \begin_layout Itemize
8721 \begin_layout Itemize
8727 \begin_layout Itemize
8733 \begin_layout Itemize
8739 \begin_layout Itemize
8745 \begin_layout Itemize
8751 \begin_layout Itemize
8757 \begin_layout Itemize
8763 \begin_layout Itemize
8767 \begin_inset space ~
8773 \begin_layout Itemize
8780 \begin_layout Standard
8781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8789 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8799 \begin_inset space ~
8802 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8803 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8804 nested section headings violate this.
8812 \begin_layout Subsection
8813 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8814 \begin_inset Index idx
8817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8818 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8826 \begin_layout Standard
8827 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8828 affected by nesting anyhow.
8832 \begin_layout Itemize
8836 \begin_layout Itemize
8840 \begin_layout Itemize
8844 \begin_layout Standard
8846 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8854 Figures and tables in
8858 are not affected by this.
8863 Have a look at section
8864 \begin_inset space ~
8868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8870 reference "sec:Floats"
8874 for more information about
8881 \begin_layout Standard
8883 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8884 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8888 \begin_layout Standard
8889 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8897 of its own, it behaves just like a
8898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8905 paragraph environment.
8906 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8910 \begin_layout Standard
8911 Here's an example with a table:
8914 \begin_layout Enumerate
8919 \begin_layout Enumerate
8920 This is (a) and it's nested.
8924 \begin_layout Standard
8925 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8931 \begin_layout Standard
8933 \begin_inset Tabular
8934 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8935 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8936 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8937 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8939 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9021 \begin_layout Standard
9022 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9029 \begin_layout Enumerate
9031 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9035 \begin_layout Enumerate
9039 \begin_layout Standard
9040 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9043 \begin_layout Enumerate
9048 \begin_layout Enumerate
9049 This is (a) and it's nested.
9053 \begin_layout Standard
9054 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9060 \begin_layout Standard
9062 \begin_inset Tabular
9063 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9064 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9065 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9066 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9068 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9150 \begin_layout Standard
9151 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9157 \begin_layout Enumerate
9164 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9167 \begin_layout Enumerate
9171 \begin_layout Standard
9172 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9176 \begin_layout Standard
9177 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9180 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9183 \begin_layout Enumerate
9188 \begin_layout Enumerate
9189 This is (a) and it's nested.
9192 \begin_layout Standard
9193 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9199 \begin_layout Standard
9201 \begin_inset Tabular
9202 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9203 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9204 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9205 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9263 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9290 \begin_layout Standard
9291 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9297 \begin_layout Enumerate
9299 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9306 \begin_layout Enumerate
9310 \begin_layout Standard
9311 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9317 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9318 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9322 \begin_layout Subsection
9323 Usage and General Features
9326 \begin_layout Standard
9327 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9328 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9330 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9337 is the innermost possible depth.
9338 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9341 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 level #1 – outermost
9346 \begin_layout Enumerate
9351 \begin_layout Enumerate
9356 \begin_layout Enumerate
9361 \begin_layout Itemize
9366 \begin_layout Itemize
9375 \begin_layout Standard
9376 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9377 both of them in the example.
9378 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9388 For example, if we tried to nest another
9393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9400 , we would get errors.
9403 \begin_layout Subsection
9405 \begin_inset Index idx
9408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9417 \begin_layout Standard
9418 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9419 We have several examples of nested environments.
9420 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9424 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9425 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9428 \begin_layout Labeling
9429 \labelwidthstring MMM
9430 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9439 \begin_layout Labeling
9440 \labelwidthstring MMM
9441 #2-a This is level #2.
9442 We created it by using
9445 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9451 arg "depth-increment"
9458 \begin_layout Labeling
9459 \labelwidthstring MMM
9460 #3-a This is level #3.
9461 This time, we just enter
9468 arg "depth-increment"
9472 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9476 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9482 arg "depth-increment"
9489 \begin_layout Standard
9494 environment, nested inside of
9495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9503 So, it's at level #4.
9504 We did this by entering
9507 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9513 arg "depth-increment"
9516 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9521 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9537 \begin_layout Standard
9542 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9545 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9551 \begin_layout Labeling
9552 \labelwidthstring MMM
9553 #4-a This is level #4.
9557 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9560 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9565 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9569 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9574 keep nesting things inside
9575 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9586 \begin_layout Labeling
9587 \labelwidthstring MMM
9588 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9593 \begin_layout Labeling
9594 \labelwidthstring MMM
9595 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9596 and this is level #6.
9597 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9601 \begin_layout Labeling
9602 \labelwidthstring MMM
9603 #5-b Back to level #5.
9607 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9613 arg "depth-decrement"
9620 \begin_layout Labeling
9621 \labelwidthstring MMM
9625 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9631 arg "depth-decrement"
9634 , we're back at level #4.
9638 \begin_layout Labeling
9639 \labelwidthstring MMM
9640 #3-b Back to level #3.
9641 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9645 \begin_layout Labeling
9646 \labelwidthstring MMM
9647 #2-b Back to level #2.
9652 \begin_layout Labeling
9653 \labelwidthstring MMM
9654 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9655 After this sentence, we will enter
9659 and change the paragraph environment back to
9666 \begin_layout Standard
9667 We could have also used the
9683 environment in place of the
9688 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9691 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9692 Example 2: Inheritance
9695 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9696 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9699 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9708 arg "depth-increment"
9712 \begin_inset Newline newline
9715 which, we will change to the
9723 \begin_layout Enumerate
9728 environment, at level #2.
9731 \begin_layout Enumerate
9732 Notice how the nested
9736 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9740 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9744 \begin_layout Standard
9745 We ended this example by entering
9750 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9754 and reset the nesting depth by using
9757 arg "depth-decrement"
9763 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9764 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9773 \begin_inset Argument 1
9776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9777 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9785 \begin_layout Enumerate
9786 This is level #1, in an
9790 paragraph environment.
9791 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9795 \begin_layout Enumerate
9800 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9806 arg "depth-increment"
9810 Now, what happens if we nest an
9814 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9815 label be? An asterisk?
9819 \begin_layout Itemize
9829 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9830 So, its label is a bullet.
9831 (We got here by using
9834 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9840 arg "depth-increment"
9843 , then changing the environment to
9851 \begin_layout Itemize
9852 Here's level #4, produced using
9855 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9861 arg "depth-increment"
9865 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9870 \begin_layout Enumerate
9873 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9878 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9882 , because we are in the
9890 environment (that is, it is an
9905 \begin_layout Enumerate
9910 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9911 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9915 \begin_layout Enumerate
9916 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9919 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9922 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9925 \begin_layout Enumerate
9929 arg "depth-decrement"
9932 to decrease the depth after the next
9935 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9942 \begin_layout Enumerate
9944 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9949 \begin_layout Enumerate
9951 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9952 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9957 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9966 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9971 reset the counter for the label.
9975 \begin_layout Enumerate
9979 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9985 arg "depth-decrement"
9988 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9989 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9990 into the twofold-nested
9998 \begin_layout Enumerate
9999 The same thing happens if we do another
10002 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10008 arg "depth-decrement"
10011 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10014 \begin_layout Standard
10015 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10020 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10031 The number of other
10035 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10042 The same rule applies for the
10046 environment, as well.
10049 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10050 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10053 \begin_layout Enumerate
10054 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10055 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10056 the same detail with how we did it.
10065 \begin_layout Standard
10073 arg "depth-increment"
10080 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10081 the example in parentheses someplace.
10082 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10083 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10084 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10088 \begin_layout Enumerate
10093 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10097 \begin_layout Verse
10098 Now we will add verse.
10099 \begin_inset Newline newline
10102 It will get much worse.
10103 \begin_inset Newline newline
10113 arg "depth-increment"
10123 \begin_layout Verse
10124 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10125 \begin_inset Newline newline
10128 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10129 \begin_inset Newline newline
10135 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10143 \begin_layout Verse
10144 Here comes a table:
10148 \begin_layout Standard
10149 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10155 \begin_layout Standard
10157 \begin_inset Tabular
10158 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10159 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10160 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10161 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10246 \begin_layout Verse
10250 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10260 arg "depth-increment"
10266 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10272 \begin_inset Newline newline
10280 arg "depth-decrement"
10287 \begin_layout Enumerate
10292 : level #1) This is another item.
10293 Note that selecting a
10297 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10298 3 times to put the table inside the
10306 \begin_layout Quotation
10307 We're now ending the
10311 list and changing to
10316 We're still at level #1.
10317 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10318 The next set of paragraphs is a
10319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10326 We will nest both the
10333 \begin_inset space ~
10338 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10342 for the letter body.
10346 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10349 to preserve the depth.
10350 Remember that you need to use
10353 arg "newline-insert newline"
10356 to create multiple lines inside the
10363 \begin_inset space ~
10373 \begin_layout Right Address
10375 \begin_inset Newline newline
10378 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10379 \begin_inset Newline newline
10385 \begin_layout Address
10387 \begin_inset space ~
10393 \begin_layout Quotation
10394 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10395 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10398 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10399 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10400 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10401 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10402 as soon as possible.
10403 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10406 \begin_layout Quotation
10407 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10408 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10409 with your order, along with payment.
10412 \begin_layout Quotation
10413 We thank you again for your patience.
10416 \begin_layout Address
10418 \begin_inset Newline newline
10425 \begin_layout Quotation
10426 That ends that example!
10429 \begin_layout Standard
10430 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10431 gives you a lot of power with just
10433 We could have easily nested an
10454 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10457 \begin_layout Subsection
10459 \begin_inset Index idx
10462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10463 Nesting ! Separation
10469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10471 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10478 \begin_layout Standard
10479 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10481 For example you need two different enumerations:
10484 \begin_layout Enumerate
10489 \begin_layout Enumerate
10494 \begin_layout Enumerate
10498 \begin_layout Standard
10499 \begin_inset Separator plain
10505 \begin_layout Itemize
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10512 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10518 \begin_layout Enumerate
10522 \begin_layout Enumerate
10526 \begin_layout Enumerate
10530 \begin_layout Standard
10531 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10532 list item and use the menu
10534 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10535 Start New Environment
10538 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10539 ) and behind it the new list.
10542 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10543 Start New Parent Environment
10545 only appears if the item is nested.
10546 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10550 \begin_layout Standard
10551 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10552 (red arrow in LyX).
10553 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10554 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10557 \begin_layout Standard
10558 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10561 arg "paragraph-break"
10568 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10571 \begin_layout Section
10572 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10573 \begin_inset Index idx
10576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10585 \begin_layout Standard
10586 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10587 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10589 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10590 be broken at the end of a line.
10591 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10595 \begin_layout Subsection
10597 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10599 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10604 \begin_inset Index idx
10607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10616 \begin_layout Standard
10617 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10618 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10619 ) not to break the line at
10621 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10624 \begin_layout Quote
10625 Further documentation is given in section
10626 \begin_inset Newline newline
10630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10632 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10640 \begin_layout Standard
10641 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10650 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10654 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10656 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10661 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10665 A protected space is set with
10667 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10668 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10670 \begin_inset space ~
10678 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10684 \begin_layout Subsection
10686 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10688 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10693 \begin_inset Index idx
10696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10697 Spacing ! Horizontal
10705 \begin_layout Standard
10706 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10708 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10709 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10713 The length units are listed in Appendix
10714 \begin_inset space ~
10718 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10720 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10727 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10731 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10736 \begin_inset Index idx
10739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10740 Spaces ! Inter-word
10748 \begin_layout Standard
10749 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10750 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10751 at the ends of sentences.
10752 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10753 automatically takes care about this.
10754 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10755 followed by a period; see section
10756 \begin_inset space ~
10760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10762 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10767 To insert a normal space, select
10769 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10770 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10772 \begin_inset space ~
10780 arg "space-insert normal"
10786 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10788 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10790 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10795 \begin_inset Index idx
10798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10807 \begin_layout Standard
10809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10816 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10825 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10826 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10827 inside abbreviations:
10830 \begin_layout Quote
10832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10836 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10839 \begin_layout Standard
10840 or between values and units.
10841 Compare for example this:
10842 \begin_inset Newline newline
10846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10850 \begin_inset Newline newline
10853 10 kg (normal space
10856 \begin_layout Standard
10857 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10859 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10860 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10862 \begin_inset space ~
10870 arg "space-insert thin"
10876 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10880 \begin_layout Standard
10881 You can also insert the following space types:
10884 \begin_layout Description
10886 \begin_inset space ~
10890 \begin_inset space ~
10893 space A line with a
10894 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10898 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10902 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10905 negative thin space between the arrows.
10908 \begin_layout Description
10910 \begin_inset space ~
10914 \begin_inset space ~
10917 space A line with a
10918 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10922 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10926 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10929 negative medium space between the arrows.
10932 \begin_layout Description
10934 \begin_inset space ~
10938 \begin_inset space ~
10941 space A line with a
10942 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10946 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10950 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10953 negative thick space between the arrows.
10956 \begin_layout Description
10958 \begin_inset space ~
10962 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10966 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10970 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10974 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10978 \begin_inset space ~
10982 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10985 em) space between the arrows.
10988 \begin_layout Description
10990 \begin_inset space ~
10994 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11002 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11006 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11010 \begin_inset space ~
11014 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11017 em) space between the arrows.
11020 \begin_layout Description
11022 \begin_inset space ~
11026 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11030 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11034 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11038 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11042 \begin_inset space ~
11046 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11049 em) space between the arrows.
11052 \begin_layout Description
11054 \begin_inset space ~
11058 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11062 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11067 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11074 cm space between the arrows.
11077 \begin_layout Standard
11079 \begin_inset space ~
11083 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11085 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11089 lists the different space sizes.
11092 \begin_layout Standard
11093 \begin_inset Float table
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11102 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11104 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11108 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11118 \begin_inset Tabular
11119 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11120 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11121 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11122 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11238 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11266 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11305 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11318 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11346 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11361 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11374 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11395 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11397 \begin_inset Index idx
11400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11409 \begin_layout Standard
11410 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11411 feature for adding extra space
11412 in a uniform fashion.
11413 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11414 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11415 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11416 equally between themselves.
11419 \begin_layout Standard
11420 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11423 \begin_layout Quote
11425 This is on the left side
11426 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11429 This is on the right
11432 \begin_layout Quote
11435 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11439 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11445 \begin_layout Quote
11448 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11452 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11456 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11462 \begin_layout Standard
11463 That was an example in the
11469 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11473 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11477 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11480 is one in a standard paragraph.
11481 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11485 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11488 \begin_layout Standard
11489 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11492 \begin_inset space ~
11497 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11500 \begin_layout Standard
11502 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11506 \begin_inset space ~
11512 \begin_layout Standard
11514 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11518 \begin_inset space ~
11524 \begin_layout Standard
11526 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11530 \begin_inset space ~
11536 \begin_layout Standard
11538 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11542 \begin_inset space ~
11548 \begin_layout Standard
11550 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11554 \begin_inset space ~
11560 \begin_layout Standard
11562 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11566 \begin_inset space ~
11572 \begin_layout Standard
11573 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11581 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11585 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11587 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11588 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11592 option in the space dialog.
11600 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11602 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11604 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11609 \begin_inset Index idx
11612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11621 \begin_layout Standard
11622 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11623 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11626 \begin_layout Standard
11627 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11630 What is correct English?:
11631 \begin_inset Newline newline
11635 \begin_inset Newline newline
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11642 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11643 \begin_inset Newline newline
11647 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11658 \begin_inset Newline newline
11662 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11673 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11679 \begin_layout Standard
11681 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11682 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11686 \begin_inset space ~
11690 \begin_inset space ~
11694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11698 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11700 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11701 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11705 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11711 \begin_inset space ~
11715 \begin_inset space ~
11719 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11722 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11731 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11732 That is why it is named
11733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11741 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11742 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11746 \begin_layout Subsection
11748 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11750 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11755 \begin_inset Index idx
11758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11767 \begin_layout Standard
11768 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11770 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11771 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11773 \begin_inset space ~
11779 There you find the following sizes:
11782 \begin_layout Standard
11795 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11796 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11801 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11804 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11806 \begin_inset space ~
11812 \begin_inset Index idx
11815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11816 Document ! Settings
11821 for the paragraph separation.
11822 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11833 \begin_layout Standard
11839 \begin_inset Index idx
11842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11848 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11849 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11854 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11855 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11864 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11873 s are described in section
11874 \begin_inset space ~
11878 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11880 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11889 If there are several
11893 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11894 You can therefore use
11898 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11906 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11907 \begin_inset space ~
11911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11913 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11920 \begin_layout Standard
11921 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11931 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11932 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11944 \begin_layout Subsection
11945 Paragraph Alignment
11946 \begin_inset Index idx
11949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11950 Paragraph ! Alignment
11958 \begin_layout Standard
11959 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11961 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11964 dialog (toolbar button
11967 arg "layout-paragraph"
11971 There are five possibilities:
11974 \begin_layout Itemize
11982 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11988 \begin_layout Itemize
11996 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
12002 \begin_layout Itemize
12010 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12016 \begin_layout Itemize
12024 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12030 \begin_layout Itemize
12038 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12044 \begin_layout Standard
12045 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12046 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12047 the left and right margins.
12048 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12051 \begin_layout Standard
12053 This paragraph is right aligned,
12056 \begin_layout Standard
12058 this one is centered,
12061 \begin_layout Standard
12063 this one is left aligned.
12066 \begin_layout Subsection
12068 \begin_inset Index idx
12071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12072 Page breaks ! Forced
12078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12080 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12087 \begin_layout Standard
12088 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12090 force a page break where you want one.
12091 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12092 is good at page breaking.
12093 Only if you use a lot of
12097 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12098 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12101 \begin_layout Standard
12102 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12103 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12107 have to change the page breaking.
12110 \begin_layout Standard
12111 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12113 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12116 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12118 \begin_inset space ~
12124 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12126 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12127 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12129 \begin_inset space ~
12134 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12136 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12137 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12140 \begin_layout Standard
12141 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12142 at the top of a page.
12143 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12145 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12146 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12147 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12149 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12151 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12155 to learn more about
12162 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12164 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12166 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12171 \begin_inset Index idx
12174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12175 Page breaks ! Clear
12183 \begin_layout Standard
12184 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12185 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12186 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12187 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12188 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12191 \begin_layout Standard
12192 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12195 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12197 \begin_inset space ~
12203 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12205 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12206 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12208 \begin_inset space ~
12212 \begin_inset space ~
12217 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12218 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12221 \begin_layout Subsection
12223 \begin_inset Index idx
12226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12233 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12235 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12242 \begin_layout Standard
12243 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12245 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12247 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12248 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 \begin_inset space ~
12254 \begin_inset space ~
12262 arg "newline-insert newline"
12266 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12269 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12271 \begin_inset space ~
12275 \begin_inset space ~
12283 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12286 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12288 This is useful to avoid
12289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12296 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12299 \begin_layout Standard
12300 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12301 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12303 very good at line breaking.
12304 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12305 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12306 \begin_inset space ~
12310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12312 reference "sec:Quote"
12317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12319 reference "sec:Verse"
12324 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12326 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12333 \begin_layout Subsection
12335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12337 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12342 \begin_inset Index idx
12345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12354 \begin_layout Standard
12356 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12367 \begin_layout Standard
12371 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12372 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12374 \begin_inset space ~
12379 you can insert horizontal lines.
12380 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12381 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12382 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12385 \begin_layout Standard
12387 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12398 \begin_layout Section
12399 Characters and Symbols
12402 \begin_layout Standard
12403 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12404 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12405 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12407 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12413 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12417 for information on how this is done.
12420 \begin_layout Standard
12421 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12426 dialog via the menu
12428 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12429 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12435 \begin_layout Standard
12436 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12444 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12445 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12447 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12455 \begin_layout Section
12456 Fonts and Text Styles
12457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12459 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12466 \begin_layout Subsection
12468 \begin_inset Index idx
12471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12481 There are two types of fonts:
12484 \begin_layout Description
12486 \begin_inset space ~
12490 \begin_inset Index idx
12493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12499 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12504 characters) in the font.
12505 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12506 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12507 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12508 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12509 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12510 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12511 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12512 \begin_inset Newline newline
12515 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12516 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12517 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12518 sizes than at small ones.
12519 \begin_inset Newline newline
12533 \begin_inset space ~
12541 \begin_layout Description
12543 \begin_inset space ~
12547 \begin_inset Index idx
12550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12556 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12557 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12558 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12559 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12560 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12561 image manipulation program.
12562 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12563 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12567 pixels high up to 34
12568 \begin_inset space ~
12571 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12572 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12573 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12575 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12576 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12577 \begin_inset Newline newline
12580 Bitmap fonts are named
12583 \begin_inset space ~
12588 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12591 \begin_layout Standard
12592 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12593 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12594 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12595 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12596 use scalable fonts.
12599 \begin_layout Standard
12600 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12603 \begin_layout Standard
12604 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12605 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12606 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12607 font to emphasize text, you use an
12608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12616 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12618 In \SpecialChar LyX
12619 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12623 \begin_layout Subsection
12626 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12628 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12635 \begin_layout Standard
12636 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12637 used its own fonts.
12638 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12639 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12642 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12643 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12644 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12645 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12646 to a word processor.
12647 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12648 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 files are very portable across
12650 different machines.
12651 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12652 has increased a lot
12653 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12656 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12658 \begin_inset space ~
12662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12664 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12669 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12670 code in the document
12671 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12674 \begin_layout Standard
12675 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12676 engines that are also able directly
12677 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12679 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12681 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12683 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12684 that is installed on your system.
12685 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12688 \begin_layout Standard
12689 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12697 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12698 es; so you might have to experiment.
12706 \begin_layout Subsection
12707 Document Font and Font size
12708 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12710 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12715 \begin_inset Index idx
12718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12725 \begin_inset Index idx
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12737 \begin_layout Standard
12738 You can set the document fonts in the
12740 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12744 \begin_inset Index idx
12747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12748 Document ! Settings
12758 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12759 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12762 \begin_inset space ~
12771 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12773 \begin_inset space ~
12776 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12779 \begin_layout Standard
12784 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12785 This requires that you use
12797 as the output format, i.
12798 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12802 \begin_inset space \space{}
12805 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12806 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12807 installed (see section
12808 \begin_inset space ~
12812 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12814 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12819 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12821 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12822 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12824 \begin_inset space ~
12827 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12828 cannot determine the family.
12829 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12830 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12833 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12836 \begin_layout Standard
12837 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12838 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12843 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12849 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12850 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12852 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12858 \begin_inset space ~
12864 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12872 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12877 European Computer Modern
12880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12887 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12890 \begin_layout Standard
12899 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12900 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12905 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12908 \begin_inset space ~
12913 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12919 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12920 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12923 \begin_layout Itemize
12927 \begin_inset space ~
12932 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12945 \begin_inset space ~
12950 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12951 community in order to replace
12955 as the default font.
12956 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12957 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12960 \begin_inset space ~
12973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12974 One difference is improved kerning.
12982 \begin_layout Itemize
12986 \begin_inset space ~
12990 \begin_inset space ~
12995 fonts in (the rare) case that
12998 \begin_inset space ~
13003 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
13018 Virtual means that it
13019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13030 -glyphs from other fonts.
13031 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13033 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13037 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13053 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13059 \begin_inset Index idx
13062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13064 -packages ! aeguill
13069 with the document preamble line
13070 \begin_inset Newline newline
13077 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13078 \begin_inset Newline newline
13083 will fix the guillemet problem.
13088 and that accented characters are not
13092 glyph, but built of
13096 characters, the accent and the letter.
13097 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13103 If you search for example for the French word
13104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13111 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13120 and not for the glyph
13121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13125 \begin_inset space ~
13129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13135 \begin_layout Itemize
13136 If you do not like the look of
13144 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13145 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13149 \begin_inset space ~
13155 \begin_inset space ~
13165 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13166 \begin_inset space ~
13169 serif and typewriter fonts,
13173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13174 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13175 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13181 \begin_inset space ~
13190 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13195 \begin_inset space \space{}
13203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13207 \begin_inset space \space{}
13213 \begin_inset space ~
13221 \begin_inset space ~
13231 but you can also select your own.
13232 \begin_inset Newline newline
13235 The differences between roman,
13238 \begin_inset space ~
13247 fonts are explained in section
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13254 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13259 \begin_inset Newline newline
13265 \begin_inset space ~
13270 was originally designed for newspapers.
13271 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13272 into the small newspaper columns.
13276 \begin_inset space ~
13281 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13285 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13298 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13303 depends on the class you are using.
13304 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13307 \begin_layout Standard
13308 Note that the font size is the
13313 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13314 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13315 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13316 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13325 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13326 \begin_inset space ~
13330 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13332 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13339 \begin_layout Standard
13343 \begin_inset space ~
13348 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13350 \begin_inset space ~
13353 serif or typewriter.
13358 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13368 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13371 \begin_layout Standard
13376 LaTeX font encoding
13378 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13379 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13385 \begin_inset Index idx
13388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13390 -packages ! fontenc
13396 \begin_inset space ~
13400 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13402 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13407 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13408 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13415 \begin_layout Standard
13416 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13418 Use Old Style Figures
13422 Use True Small Caps
13425 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13428 Use Old Style Figures
13430 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13432 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13433 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13437 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13440 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13444 Use True Small Caps
13446 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13447 of scaled capitals.
13448 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13449 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13452 \begin_layout Standard
13457 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13458 a font to display the script characters.
13462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13463 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13469 \begin_inset Index idx
13472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13479 So this has no effect for the document language
13493 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13497 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13505 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13510 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13511 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13513 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13515 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13518 dialog, see section
13519 \begin_inset space ~
13523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13525 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13537 \begin_layout Subsection
13541 \begin_layout Standard
13542 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13543 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13545 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13546 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13547 choose a math font in the dialog
13549 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13553 \begin_inset Index idx
13556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13557 Document ! Settings
13563 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13564 automatically selects a math font.
13565 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13566 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13575 \begin_inset space ~
13581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13586 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13587 document font is available.
13590 \begin_layout Standard
13591 Note that the math font will not be used for
13595 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13601 or by the insertion of the command
13608 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13609 \begin_inset space ~
13613 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13614 while the math characters do not.
13616 \begin_inset space ~
13619 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13622 \begin_inset space ~
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13635 in the document font settings.
13638 \begin_layout Standard
13639 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13640 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13641 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13642 font (in most cases
13643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13649 \begin_inset space ~
13655 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13658 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13659 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13667 \begin_inset space ~
13673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13679 \begin_layout Subsection
13680 Using Different Character Styles
13681 \begin_inset Index idx
13684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13691 \begin_inset Index idx
13694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13704 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13705 automatically changes the character style for certain
13706 paragraph environments.
13708 supports two character styles,
13717 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13721 \begin_layout Standard
13726 style, do one of the following:
13729 \begin_layout Itemize
13730 click on the toolbar button
13739 \begin_layout Itemize
13740 use the key binding
13749 \begin_layout Standard
13750 These commands are all toggles.
13755 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13758 \begin_layout Standard
13759 One typically uses the
13763 style for proper names.
13765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13772 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13780 \begin_layout Standard
13781 A more widely used character style is the
13786 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13793 \begin_layout Itemize
13794 clicking on the toolbar button
13803 \begin_layout Itemize
13804 using the keybindings
13813 \begin_layout Standard
13818 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13820 use a different font.
13823 \begin_layout Standard
13824 We've been using the
13828 style all over the place in this document.
13829 Here's one more example:
13832 \begin_layout Quotation
13835 Do not overuse character styles!
13838 \begin_layout Standard
13839 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13840 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13841 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13842 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13846 \begin_layout Standard
13847 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13855 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13857 \begin_inset space ~
13860 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13866 arg "dialog-show character"
13872 \begin_layout Subsection
13873 Fine-Tuning with the
13878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13880 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13885 \begin_inset Index idx
13888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13897 \begin_layout Standard
13898 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13900 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13901 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13902 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13903 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13904 from ordinary dialog.
13907 \begin_layout Standard
13908 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13909 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13910 \begin_inset Newline newline
13913 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13914 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13917 \begin_layout Standard
13918 To use custom character styles, open the
13920 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13922 \begin_inset space ~
13925 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13928 dialog or press the toolbar button
13931 arg "dialog-show character"
13935 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13936 font property that you can choose.
13937 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13940 \begin_inset space ~
13945 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13950 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13951 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13952 environments all at once.
13955 \begin_layout Standard
13956 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13959 \begin_inset space ~
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13986 The possible options are:
13990 \begin_layout Labeling
13991 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13996 This is the Roman font family.
13997 Normally a serif font.
13998 It's also the default family.
14008 \begin_layout Labeling
14009 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14013 \begin_inset space ~
14020 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14032 \begin_layout Labeling
14033 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14040 This is the Typewriter font family.
14046 arg "font-typewriter"
14055 \begin_layout Labeling
14056 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14061 This corresponds to the print weight.
14066 \begin_layout Labeling
14067 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14072 This is the Medium font series.
14073 It's also the default series.
14076 \begin_layout Labeling
14077 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14084 This is the Bold font series.
14097 \begin_layout Labeling
14098 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14103 As the name implies.
14108 \begin_layout Labeling
14109 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14114 This is the Upright font shape.
14115 It's also the default shape.
14118 \begin_layout Labeling
14119 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14133 s the Italic font shape
14139 \begin_layout Labeling
14140 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14147 This is the Slanted font shape
14149 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14150 , this is different from italic).
14153 \begin_layout Labeling
14154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14158 \begin_inset space ~
14165 This is the Small caps font shape
14172 \begin_layout Labeling
14173 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14178 Alters the text color.
14179 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14183 \begin_inset space ~
14188 , which means that the document default color set in
14190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14191 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14197 \begin_inset space ~
14202 is used, you can choose between
14279 \begin_inset Index idx
14282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14291 \begin_layout Labeling
14292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14297 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14298 the language of the document.
14299 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14300 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14302 \begin_inset Newline newline
14305 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14307 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14308 When using the spell checking (see section
14309 \begin_inset space ~
14313 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14315 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14319 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14322 \begin_layout Labeling
14323 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14328 Alters the size of the font.
14329 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14330 proportional to the document font size.
14331 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14332 the details, but a general description of what
14338 \begin_layout Labeling
14339 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14360 arg "font-size tiny"
14366 \begin_layout Labeling
14367 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14375 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14379 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14388 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14394 \begin_layout Labeling
14395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14403 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14407 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14416 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14422 \begin_layout Labeling
14423 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14444 arg "font-size small"
14450 \begin_layout Labeling
14451 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14465 It's also the default size.
14469 arg "font-size normal"
14475 \begin_layout Labeling
14476 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14497 arg "font-size large"
14503 \begin_layout Labeling
14504 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14525 arg "font-size larger"
14531 \begin_layout Labeling
14532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14553 arg "font-size largest"
14559 \begin_layout Labeling
14560 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14581 arg "font-size huge"
14587 \begin_layout Labeling
14588 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14609 arg "font-size giant"
14615 \begin_layout Labeling
14616 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14621 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14622 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14626 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14641 arg "font-size increase"
14647 \begin_layout Labeling
14648 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14653 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14673 arg "font-size decrease"
14680 \begin_layout Standard
14685 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14686 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14688 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14689 — use those instead.
14690 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14693 \begin_layout Labeling
14694 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14699 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14704 \begin_layout Labeling
14705 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14712 This is text with emphasize on
14715 This might seem like the same as
14719 , but it is actually a bit different.
14725 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14727 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14730 \begin_layout Labeling
14731 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14738 This is text with Underbar on.
14744 arg "font-underline"
14750 \begin_inset Newline newline
14755 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14756 when you could not change fonts.
14757 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14758 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14759 because some people
14763 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14766 \begin_layout Labeling
14767 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14771 \begin_inset space ~
14778 This is text with Double underbar on.
14784 arg "font-underunderline"
14788 \begin_inset Newline newline
14791 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14792 about double underbar.
14795 \begin_layout Labeling
14796 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14800 \begin_inset space ~
14807 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14813 arg "font-underwave"
14817 \begin_inset Newline newline
14820 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14821 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14824 \begin_layout Labeling
14825 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14832 This is text with Strikeout on.
14838 arg "font-strikeout"
14842 \begin_inset Newline newline
14845 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14846 changed in the meantime.
14849 \begin_layout Labeling
14850 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14857 This is text with Noun on.
14864 , this is a logical attribute.
14865 Normally it's equivalent to
14868 \begin_inset space ~
14877 \begin_layout Standard
14878 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14879 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14881 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14883 \begin_inset space ~
14886 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14892 arg "dialog-show character"
14895 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14896 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14899 arg "textstyle-apply"
14903 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14907 \begin_layout Standard
14908 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14915 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14916 (suppose you just set the shape to
14917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14935 \begin_inset space ~
14947 \begin_layout Standard
14948 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14956 \begin_inset space ~
14968 \begin_layout Itemize
14974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14981 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14986 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14990 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14994 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14999 \begin_inset Newline newline
15003 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
15006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15017 \begin_inset Note Note
15020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15021 For more on phantoms see section
15022 \begin_inset space ~
15026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15028 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15038 \begin_inset Newline newline
15044 \begin_layout Itemize
15049 fonts use characters with serifs.
15050 These are the small
15051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15055 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15058 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15059 The following example shows the difference:
15060 \begin_inset Newline newline
15064 \begin_inset Newline newline
15069 text without serifs
15072 \begin_inset Newline newline
15075 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15076 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15083 \begin_layout Itemize
15088 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15089 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15090 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15093 \begin_layout Standard
15094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15101 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15102 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15105 \begin_inset space ~
15110 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15111 the property to be removed.
15112 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15113 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15114 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15132 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15133 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15141 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15145 \begin_inset space ~
15150 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15161 If you, for example, set
15162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15185 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15194 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15197 \begin_layout Standard
15198 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15199 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15202 \begin_layout Section
15203 Printing and Previewing
15206 \begin_layout Subsection
15210 \begin_layout Standard
15211 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15212 using \SpecialChar LyX
15213 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15214 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15215 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15216 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15218 Additional Features
15223 \begin_layout Standard
15225 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15228 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15229 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15230 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15233 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15234 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15235 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15236 to turn your writing into printable output.
15237 This happens in two stages:
15240 \begin_layout Enumerate
15241 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15242 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15244 a file with the extension,
15245 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15253 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15259 \begin_layout Enumerate
15260 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15261 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15262 to use the commands in the
15266 file to produce printable output.
15269 \begin_layout Subsection
15270 Output file formats
15271 \begin_inset Index idx
15274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15281 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15283 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15290 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15291 Simple text (ASCII)
15292 \begin_inset Index idx
15295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15296 File formats ! ASCII
15304 \begin_layout Standard
15305 This file type has the extension
15306 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15314 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15318 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15322 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15329 \begin_layout Standard
15330 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15332 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15333 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15335 \begin_inset space ~
15341 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15342 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15343 bibliography (section
15344 \begin_inset space ~
15348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15350 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15355 If your document includes such material, use
15357 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15358 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15360 \begin_inset space ~
15364 \begin_inset space ~
15368 \begin_inset space ~
15376 \begin_inset space ~
15380 \begin_inset space ~
15386 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15387 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15390 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15393 \begin_inset Index idx
15396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15397 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15406 \begin_layout Standard
15407 This file type has the extension
15408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15419 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15422 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15424 -Errors or to process it manually
15425 with console commands.
15426 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15427 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15428 's temporary directory whenever you
15429 view or export your document.
15432 \begin_layout Standard
15433 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15434 -file using the menu
15436 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15437 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15441 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15442 export variants are explained in section
15443 \begin_inset space ~
15447 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15449 reference "subsec:Export"
15456 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15458 \begin_inset Index idx
15461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15470 \begin_layout Standard
15471 This file type has the extension
15472 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15492 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15493 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15494 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15498 \begin_layout Standard
15499 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15500 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15501 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15502 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15503 when you view the DVI.
15504 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15507 \begin_layout Standard
15508 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15510 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15511 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15516 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15517 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15519 \begin_inset space ~
15525 The latter option uses the program
15527 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15533 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15536 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15537 font access (see section
15538 \begin_inset space ~
15542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15544 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15549 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15550 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15557 \begin_inset Index idx
15560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15561 File formats ! PostScript
15569 \begin_layout Standard
15570 This file type has the extension
15571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 PostScript was developed by the company
15587 as a printer language.
15588 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15590 PostScript can be seen as a
15591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15594 programming language
15595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15598 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15603 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15610 \begin_inset Index idx
15613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15615 -packages ! pstricks
15625 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15628 \begin_layout Standard
15629 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15630 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 Encapsulated PostScript
15634 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15637 (EPS, file extension
15638 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15646 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15650 As \SpecialChar LyX
15651 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15652 convert them in the background to EPS.
15653 If, for example, you have 50
15654 \begin_inset space ~
15657 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15659 \begin_inset space ~
15662 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15663 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15665 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15666 EPS to avoid this problem.
15669 \begin_layout Standard
15670 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15672 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15673 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15679 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15681 \begin_inset Index idx
15684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15691 \begin_inset Index idx
15694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15703 \begin_layout Standard
15704 This file type has the extension
15705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15713 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15718 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15721 Portable Document Format
15722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15729 was derived from PostScript.
15730 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15732 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15739 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15740 looks exactly the same.
15743 \begin_layout Standard
15744 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15745 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15748 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15749 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15752 (JPG, file extension
15753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15761 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15777 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15780 Portable Network Graphics
15781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15784 (PNG, file extension
15785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15797 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15798 converts them in the
15799 background to one of these formats.
15800 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15801 will slow down your workflow.
15802 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15805 \begin_layout Standard
15806 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15814 \begin_layout Description
15816 \begin_inset space ~
15819 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15823 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15826 \begin_layout Description
15828 \begin_inset space ~
15835 ) This uses the program
15837 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15840 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15843 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15846 is a new engine, derived from
15850 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15851 access (see section
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15858 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15863 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15864 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15869 \begin_layout Description
15871 \begin_inset space ~
15878 ) This uses the program
15883 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15889 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15890 font access (see section
15891 \begin_inset space ~
15895 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15897 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15902 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15903 vertically written Japanese.
15906 \begin_layout Description
15908 \begin_inset space ~
15911 (cropped) This is the same as
15914 \begin_inset space ~
15919 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15920 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15921 to generate good-looking
15922 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15925 \begin_layout Description
15927 \begin_inset space ~
15930 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15934 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15938 \begin_layout Description
15940 \begin_inset space ~
15943 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15947 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15948 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15952 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15953 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15956 \begin_layout Standard
15960 \begin_inset space ~
15969 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15970 works without problems.
15971 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15972 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15976 \begin_inset space ~
15984 \begin_inset space ~
15989 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15997 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15999 \begin_inset Index idx
16002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16003 FileFormats ! XHTML
16009 \begin_inset Index idx
16012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16021 \begin_layout Standard
16022 This file type has the extension
16023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16035 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16036 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16037 When \SpecialChar LyX
16038 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16039 suitable for the purpose.
16040 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16042 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16043 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16046 between different formats, which are described in section
16048 Math Output in XHTML
16053 \begin_inset space ~
16061 \begin_layout Standard
16062 XHTML output remains
16063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16070 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16071 features are supported yet.
16075 and the World Wide Web
16079 Additional Features
16081 manual, for more information.
16084 \begin_layout Standard
16085 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16087 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16088 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16094 \begin_layout Subsection
16096 \begin_inset Index idx
16099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16108 \begin_layout Standard
16109 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16110 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16119 or use the toolbar button
16126 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16127 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16128 \begin_inset space ~
16132 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16134 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16138 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16140 \begin_inset space ~
16144 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16146 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16151 Further output formats can be selected via
16153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16154 View (Other Formats)
16156 or the toolbar button
16165 \begin_layout Standard
16166 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16167 viewer window using the menu
16169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16174 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16175 Update (Other Formats)
16180 \begin_layout Standard
16181 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16184 To have a real output, export your document.
16187 \begin_layout Section
16188 A few Words about Typography
16189 \begin_inset Index idx
16192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16201 \begin_layout Subsection
16202 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16203 \begin_inset Index idx
16206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16213 \begin_inset Index idx
16216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16225 \begin_layout Standard
16226 In \SpecialChar LyX
16228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16239 character comes in four lengths: the
16251 , and the minus sign:
16252 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16258 \begin_layout Standard
16259 \begin_inset Tabular
16260 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16261 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16262 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16263 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16264 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16265 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16284 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16294 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16304 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16334 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16361 \begin_inset space ~
16364 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16371 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16396 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16398 \begin_inset space ~
16401 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16422 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16456 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16462 \begin_layout Standard
16463 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16475 character multiple times in a row.
16476 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16477 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16480 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16496 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16500 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16510 \begin_layout Standard
16511 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16512 math mode and has a length of its own.
16513 Here are some examples:
16516 \begin_layout Enumerate
16517 line- and page-breaks
16518 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16528 \begin_layout Enumerate
16530 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16540 \begin_layout Enumerate
16541 Oh — there's a dash.
16542 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16552 \begin_layout Enumerate
16553 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16557 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16567 \begin_layout Subsection
16569 \begin_inset Index idx
16572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16579 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16581 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16588 \begin_layout Standard
16589 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16590 but automatically in the output.
16591 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16597 \begin_inset Index idx
16600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16607 following the rules of the document language.
16610 \begin_layout Standard
16612 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16616 font and with unusual constructs, like
16617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16625 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16626 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16627 This is done with the menu
16629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16630 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16632 \begin_inset space ~
16638 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16640 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16644 \begin_layout Standard
16645 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16646 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16657 would then see the hyphen
16658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16665 as a hyphenation possibility.
16666 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16667 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16668 as described in section
16670 Prevent Hyphenation
16675 \begin_inset space ~
16683 \begin_layout Subsection
16685 \begin_inset Index idx
16688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16697 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16698 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16699 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16701 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16708 \begin_layout Standard
16709 When \SpecialChar LyX
16710 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16711 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16713 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16716 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16719 appropriate amount of space.
16720 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16723 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16725 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16726 gets after another word.
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16731 not work in all cases.
16733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16744 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16745 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16748 \begin_layout Standard
16749 Here are some examples of
16753 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16756 \begin_layout Itemize
16761 \begin_layout Itemize
16766 \begin_layout Standard
16767 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16770 \begin_layout Itemize
16772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16776 this is too much space!
16779 \begin_layout Itemize
16784 \begin_layout Standard
16785 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16788 \begin_layout Standard
16789 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16792 \begin_layout Enumerate
16796 \begin_inset space ~
16801 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16802 \begin_inset space ~
16806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16808 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16813 \begin_inset Index idx
16816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16817 Spaces ! inter-word
16825 \begin_layout Enumerate
16829 \begin_inset space ~
16834 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16835 \begin_inset space ~
16839 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16841 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16846 \begin_inset Index idx
16849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16858 \begin_layout Enumerate
16862 \begin_inset space ~
16866 \begin_inset space ~
16870 \begin_inset space ~
16877 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16879 \begin_inset space ~
16884 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16885 This function is also bound to
16888 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16894 \begin_layout Standard
16895 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16898 \begin_layout Itemize
16900 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16904 \begin_inset space \space{}
16907 this is too much space!
16910 \begin_layout Itemize
16911 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16915 \begin_layout Standard
16916 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16917 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16919 will take care of this.
16922 \begin_layout Standard
16923 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16927 \begin_inset space ~
16933 feature described in the section
16935 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16940 Additional Features
16945 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16947 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16949 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16953 \begin_inset Index idx
16956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16958 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16960 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16969 \begin_inset Index idx
16972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16974 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16976 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17009 \begin_layout Standard
17012 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
17014 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
17018 Specifically, it will
17019 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17021 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17025 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17027 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17030 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17031 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17033 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17038 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17042 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17046 The keyboard character,
17050 , generates this automatically.
17053 \begin_layout Standard
17054 You can specify what character the
17059 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17063 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17072 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17076 \begin_inset Index idx
17079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17080 Document ! Settings
17086 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17088 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17094 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17097 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17098 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17102 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17104 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17110 \begin_layout Labeling
17111 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17114 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17125 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17135 \begin_inset space ~
17139 \begin_inset space ~
17143 \begin_inset Quotes els
17147 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17155 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17157 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17165 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17167 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17171 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17179 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17181 \begin_inset Quotes els
17185 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17188 quotation marks (as common, e.
17189 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17197 \begin_layout Labeling
17198 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17200 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17203 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17207 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17211 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17213 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17217 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17221 \begin_inset space ~
17225 \begin_inset space ~
17229 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17233 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17241 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17242 Use quotes like ”this”
17243 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17245 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17249 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17253 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17257 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17260 quotation marks (as common, e.
17261 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17269 \begin_layout Labeling
17270 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17272 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17275 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17279 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17283 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17285 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17289 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17293 \begin_inset space ~
17297 \begin_inset space ~
17301 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17305 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17313 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17315 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17319 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17323 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17325 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17329 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17333 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17337 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17340 quotation marks (as common, e.
17341 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17349 \begin_layout Labeling
17350 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17352 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17355 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17359 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17363 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17365 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17369 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17373 \begin_inset space ~
17377 \begin_inset space ~
17381 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17385 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17393 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17395 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17399 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17403 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17405 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17409 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17413 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17417 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17420 quotation marks (as common, e.
17421 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17429 \begin_layout Labeling
17430 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17432 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17435 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17439 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17443 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17445 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17449 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17453 \begin_inset space ~
17457 \begin_inset space ~
17461 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17465 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17473 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17475 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17479 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17483 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17485 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17489 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17493 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17497 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17500 quotation marks (as common, e.
17501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17504 g., in Switzerland)
17509 \begin_layout Labeling
17510 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17512 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17515 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17519 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17523 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17525 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17529 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17533 \begin_inset space ~
17537 \begin_inset space ~
17541 \begin_inset Quotes als
17545 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17553 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17555 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17559 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17563 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17565 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17569 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17573 \begin_inset Quotes als
17577 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17580 quotation marks (as common, e.
17581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17587 \begin_layout Labeling
17588 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17590 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17593 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17597 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17601 \begin_inset space ~
17605 \begin_inset space ~
17609 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17613 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17619 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17623 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17627 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17631 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17634 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17637 \begin_layout Labeling
17638 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17640 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17643 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17647 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17651 \begin_inset space ~
17655 \begin_inset space ~
17659 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17663 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17669 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17673 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17677 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17681 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17684 quotation marks (as common, e.
17685 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17688 g., in Great Britain)
17691 \begin_layout Labeling
17692 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17694 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17697 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17701 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17705 \begin_inset space ~
17709 \begin_inset space ~
17713 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17717 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17723 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17727 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17731 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17735 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17738 quotation marks (as common, e.
17739 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17745 \begin_layout Labeling
17746 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17748 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17751 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17755 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17759 \begin_inset space ~
17763 \begin_inset space ~
17767 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17771 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17777 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17781 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17785 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17789 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17792 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17798 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17799 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17800 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17801 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17802 the inner marks differ).
17812 \begin_layout Labeling
17813 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17815 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17818 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17826 \begin_inset space ~
17830 \begin_inset space ~
17834 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17838 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17844 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17848 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17852 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17856 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17859 quotation marks (as common, e.
17860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17866 \begin_layout Labeling
17867 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17869 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17872 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17876 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17880 \begin_inset space ~
17884 \begin_inset space ~
17888 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17892 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17898 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17902 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17906 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17910 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17913 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17916 \begin_layout Labeling
17917 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17919 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17920 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17928 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17934 \begin_inset space ~
17938 \begin_inset space ~
17944 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17952 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17956 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17960 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17964 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17968 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17971 quotation marks (as common, e.
17972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17981 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17982 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17983 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17993 \begin_layout Labeling
17994 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17996 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17997 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18005 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18011 \begin_inset space ~
18015 \begin_inset space ~
18021 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18029 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18033 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18037 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18041 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18045 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18048 quotation marks (as common, e.
18049 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18052 g., in North Korea and China)
18056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18058 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18059 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18060 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18070 \begin_layout Standard
18072 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18074 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18078 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18080 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18087 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18088 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18089 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18090 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18091 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18095 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18098 does not necessarily mean
18099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18103 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18107 This is why we call them
18108 \begin_inset Quotes els
18112 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18116 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18120 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18133 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18134 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18136 \begin_inset Quotes els
18140 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18144 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18146 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18147 can be obtained by means of
18152 arg "quote-insert inner"
18156 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18159 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18165 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18169 \begin_layout Standard
18171 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18172 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18173 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18174 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18175 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18176 If you check the setting
18178 Use dynamic quotation marks
18182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18183 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18186 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18187 they appear in a special color).
18188 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18189 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18194 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18197 \begin_layout Standard
18199 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18200 Individual quotation marks (i.
18201 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18204 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18205 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18211 \begin_layout Subsection
18213 \begin_inset Index idx
18216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18217 Typography ! Ligatures
18223 \begin_inset Index idx
18226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18257 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18264 \begin_layout Standard
18265 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18266 print them as single characters.
18267 These groups are known as
18272 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18273 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18275 Here are the standard ligatures:
18278 \begin_layout Itemize
18282 \begin_layout Itemize
18286 \begin_layout Itemize
18290 \begin_layout Itemize
18294 \begin_layout Itemize
18298 \begin_layout Standard
18299 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18302 \begin_layout Standard
18303 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18304 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18312 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18328 To break a ligature, use
18330 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18331 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18333 \begin_inset space ~
18340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18351 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18365 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18368 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18376 \begin_layout Subsection
18378 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18380 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18382 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18386 \begin_inset Index idx
18389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18399 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18406 \begin_layout Standard
18409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18410 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18414 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18417 \begin_layout Description
18419 The name of the game.
18422 \begin_layout Description
18424 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18428 \begin_layout Description
18430 The \SpecialChar TeX
18431 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18435 \begin_layout Description
18436 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18437 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18441 \begin_layout Standard
18442 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18448 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18452 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18456 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18457 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18458 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18459 converges to the number
18460 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18463 : The actual version is
18464 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18472 , the previous one was
18473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18478 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18484 \begin_layout Subsection
18486 \begin_inset Index idx
18489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18498 \begin_layout Standard
18499 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18500 space between two words.
18501 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18504 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18508 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18511 for units use the menu
18513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18514 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18516 \begin_inset space ~
18524 arg "space-insert thin"
18530 \begin_layout Standard
18531 Here is an example to show the differences:
18534 \begin_layout Standard
18535 \begin_inset Tabular
18536 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18537 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18538 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18539 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18541 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18546 \begin_inset space ~
18550 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18562 space between number and unit
18569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18578 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18590 half space between number and unit
18603 \begin_layout Subsection
18605 \begin_inset Index idx
18608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18609 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18617 \begin_layout Standard
18618 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18620 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18621 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18622 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18623 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18624 These bits of text became known as
18635 \begin_layout Standard
18636 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18637 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18638 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18639 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18640 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18641 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18642 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18643 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18644 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18645 \begin_inset Newline newline
18653 \begin_inset Newline newline
18661 \begin_inset Newline newline
18664 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18665 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18666 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18668 \begin_inset space ~
18672 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18674 key "latexcompanion"
18680 \begin_inset space ~
18684 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18691 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18692 's page break mechanism.
18695 \begin_layout Chapter
18696 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18697 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18699 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18706 \begin_layout Standard
18707 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18710 \begin_inset space ~
18716 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18719 \begin_layout Section
18721 \begin_inset Index idx
18724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18740 \begin_layout Standard
18742 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18745 \begin_layout Description
18748 \begin_inset space ~
18751 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18752 \begin_inset Newline newline
18756 \begin_inset Note Note
18759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18760 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18768 \begin_layout Description
18769 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18770 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18771 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18774 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18775 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18777 \begin_inset space ~
18783 \begin_inset Newline newline
18787 \begin_inset Note Comment
18790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18791 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18800 \begin_layout Description
18802 \begin_inset space ~
18805 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18806 set in the document settings under
18808 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18810 \begin_inset space ~
18816 \begin_inset Newline newline
18820 \begin_inset Newline newline
18824 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18833 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18834 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18839 of a comment that appears in the output.
18845 \begin_inset Newline newline
18849 \begin_inset Newline newline
18852 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18855 \begin_layout Standard
18856 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18864 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18868 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18871 \begin_layout Section
18873 \begin_inset Index idx
18876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18883 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18885 name "sec:Footnotes"
18892 \begin_layout Standard
18894 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18897 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18900 or the toolbar button
18903 arg "footnote-insert"
18915 \begin_inset Graphics
18916 filename clipart/footnote.png
18925 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18926 's representation of your footnote.
18936 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18955 label, the box will
18959 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18960 Clicking on the box label again will close
18973 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18974 and click on the footnote
18989 \begin_layout Standard
18990 Here is an example footnote:
18998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18999 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19007 \begin_layout Standard
19008 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19009 position where the footnote box is placed.
19010 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19011 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19012 according to the document class.
19014 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19015 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19021 ey are described in the
19024 \begin_inset space ~
19032 \begin_layout Section
19034 \begin_inset Index idx
19037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19044 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19046 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19053 \begin_layout Standard
19054 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19056 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19058 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19060 \begin_inset space ~
19065 or the toolbar button
19068 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19087 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19091 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19094 appearing within your text.
19095 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19096 's representation of your margin
19105 \begin_layout Standard
19106 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19110 \begin_inset Marginal
19113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19115 This is a marginal note.
19123 \begin_layout Standard
19124 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19125 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19126 pages, right on odd pages.
19129 \begin_layout Standard
19130 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19133 \begin_inset space ~
19141 \begin_inset space ~
19149 \begin_layout Section
19150 Graphics and Images
19151 \begin_inset Index idx
19154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19161 \begin_inset Index idx
19164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19173 name "sec:Graphics"
19180 \begin_layout Standard
19181 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19182 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19185 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19190 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19194 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19197 \begin_layout Standard
19198 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19203 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19204 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19206 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19207 \begin_inset space ~
19211 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19213 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19220 \begin_layout Standard
19225 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19226 of the image in the output.
19227 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19235 \begin_inset space ~
19244 \begin_inset space ~
19248 \begin_inset space ~
19252 \begin_inset space ~
19257 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19258 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19266 \begin_layout Standard
19270 \begin_inset space ~
19274 \begin_inset space ~
19279 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19280 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19282 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19287 \begin_inset space ~
19292 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19293 with the image size is printed.
19296 \begin_layout Standard
19297 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19298 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19300 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19303 \begin_layout Standard
19305 \begin_inset Graphics
19306 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19314 \begin_layout Standard
19315 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19316 the image into a float, see section
19317 \begin_inset space ~
19321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19323 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19330 \begin_layout Subsection
19332 \begin_inset Index idx
19335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19342 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19344 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19351 \begin_layout Standard
19352 You can insert images in any known file format.
19353 But as we explained in section
19354 \begin_inset space ~
19358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19360 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19364 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19366 therefore uses the program
19370 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19371 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19372 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19373 \begin_inset space ~
19377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19379 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19386 \begin_layout Standard
19387 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19390 \begin_layout Description
19392 \begin_inset space ~
19395 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19396 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19397 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19401 Graphics Interchange Format
19402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19405 (GIF, file extension
19406 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19418 \begin_inset Index idx
19421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19453 Portable Network Graphics
19454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19457 (PNG, file extension
19458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19466 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19470 \begin_inset Index idx
19473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19502 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19505 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19506 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19509 (JPG, file extension
19510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19530 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19534 \begin_inset Index idx
19537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19568 \begin_layout Description
19570 \begin_inset space ~
19573 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19575 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19576 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19577 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19578 \begin_inset Newline newline
19581 Scalable image formats can be
19582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19585 Scalable Vector Graphics
19586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19589 (SVG, file extension
19590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19598 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19602 \begin_inset Index idx
19605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19637 Encapsulated PostScript
19638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19641 (EPS, file extension
19642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19650 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19654 \begin_inset Index idx
19657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19689 Portable Document Format
19690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19693 (PDF, file extension
19694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19706 \begin_inset Index idx
19709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19724 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19725 result will not be scalable.
19726 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19732 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19740 \begin_layout Standard
19741 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19748 \begin_layout Subsection
19749 Grouping of Image Settings
19750 \begin_inset Index idx
19753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19754 Images ! Settings grouping
19762 \begin_layout Standard
19763 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19765 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19766 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19768 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19769 need to manually change each of them.
19773 \begin_layout Standard
19774 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19777 \begin_inset space ~
19781 \begin_inset space ~
19793 \begin_inset space ~
19797 \begin_inset space ~
19803 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19804 and checking the name of the desired group.
19807 \begin_layout Section
19809 \begin_inset Index idx
19812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19819 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19828 \begin_layout Standard
19829 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19832 arg "tabular-insert"
19837 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19841 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19842 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19843 from the rest of the table.
19844 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19845 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19847 Here is an example table:
19850 \begin_layout Standard
19852 \begin_inset Tabular
19853 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19854 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19855 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19856 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19857 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19858 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19860 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19934 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19972 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19994 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20023 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20041 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20058 \begin_layout Subsection
20062 \begin_layout Standard
20063 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20066 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20070 This brings up the table dialog.
20071 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20072 cursor is placed currently.
20073 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20074 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20075 done on all of your selection.
20078 \begin_layout Standard
20079 In addition to the table dialog, the
20082 \begin_inset space ~
20087 helps you in setting table properties.
20088 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20091 \begin_layout Standard
20095 \begin_inset space ~
20100 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20101 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20102 current cell respectively.
20103 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20105 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20106 of text, see section
20107 \begin_inset space ~
20111 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20113 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20120 \begin_layout Standard
20121 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20122 using the check box
20131 This will merge the cells to
20135 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20136 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20137 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20138 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20139 in the last row without the upper border:
20142 \begin_layout Standard
20144 \begin_inset Tabular
20145 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20146 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20147 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20148 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20149 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20150 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20161 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20170 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20246 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20264 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20267 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20281 \begin_layout Standard
20282 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20283 -arguments for the table.
20284 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20285 explained in the chapter
20292 \begin_inset space ~
20298 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20299 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20300 but are visible in the output.
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20304 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20312 Most DVI-viewers are
20316 able to display rotations.
20324 \begin_layout Standard
20329 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20334 adds lines for all cell borders.
20337 \begin_layout Subsection
20339 \begin_inset Index idx
20342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20343 Tables ! Multi-page
20349 \begin_inset Index idx
20352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20361 \begin_layout Standard
20362 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20365 \begin_inset space ~
20369 \begin_inset space ~
20377 \begin_inset space ~
20382 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20383 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20386 \begin_layout Description
20391 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20392 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20393 Except for the first page, if
20396 \begin_inset space ~
20404 \begin_layout Description
20408 \begin_inset space ~
20413 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20414 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20417 \begin_layout Description
20422 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20423 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20424 except for the last page, if
20427 \begin_inset space ~
20435 \begin_layout Description
20439 \begin_inset space ~
20444 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20445 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20448 \begin_layout Description
20449 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20450 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20452 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20456 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20459 \begin_inset space ~
20467 \begin_layout Standard
20468 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20469 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20470 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20476 In this context, first means first in this order:
20479 \begin_inset space ~
20491 \begin_inset space ~
20496 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20499 \begin_layout Standard
20501 \begin_inset Tabular
20502 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20503 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20504 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20505 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20506 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20507 <row endfirsthead="true">
20508 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20514 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20519 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20522 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20528 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <row endfirsthead="true">
20539 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20559 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <row endhead="true">
20572 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20583 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20592 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <row endhead="true">
20603 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20623 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <row endfoot="true">
20636 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20647 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20656 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20667 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20687 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20853 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21225 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21318 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21504 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21628 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21637 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21646 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21657 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21688 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21719 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21750 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21781 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21812 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21843 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21874 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21905 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21936 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21967 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21998 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22029 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22060 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22122 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22153 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22184 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22215 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22246 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22277 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22308 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22339 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22370 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22401 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22463 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22474 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22494 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22525 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22556 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22587 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22607 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <row endlastfoot="true">
22618 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22629 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22638 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22655 \begin_layout Subsection
22657 \begin_inset Index idx
22660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22669 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22676 \begin_layout Standard
22677 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22678 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22679 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22680 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22684 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22687 \begin_layout Standard
22688 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22689 for the column in the table dialog.
22690 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22691 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22695 \begin_layout Standard
22697 \begin_inset Tabular
22698 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22699 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22700 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22701 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22702 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22722 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22791 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22816 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22847 This is longer now.
22852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22890 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22903 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22904 This is longer now.
22909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22935 \begin_layout Standard
22936 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22937 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22942 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22943 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22949 Selection with the mouse or with
22953 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22954 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22955 the selection from outside the table.
22958 \begin_layout Section
22960 \begin_inset Index idx
22963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22979 \begin_layout Subsection
22983 \begin_layout Standard
22984 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22985 have a fixed location.
22987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22994 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23002 \begin_inset space ~
23007 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23008 too many notes on the current page.
23011 \begin_layout Standard
23012 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23013 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23014 and pages without text.
23015 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23016 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23017 Floats are therefore numbered.
23018 Referencing is described in section
23019 \begin_inset space ~
23023 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23025 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23032 \begin_layout Standard
23033 To insert a float, use the menu
23035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23039 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23040 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23042 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23043 \begin_inset Index idx
23046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23052 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23053 paragraph within the float.
23054 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23055 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23056 left-clicking on the box label.
23057 A closed float box looks like this:
23058 \begin_inset Graphics
23059 filename clipart/float.png
23064 – a gray button with a red label.
23067 \begin_layout Standard
23068 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23070 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23073 \begin_layout Subsection
23075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23077 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23082 \begin_inset Index idx
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 Floats ! Figure floats
23094 \begin_layout Standard
23096 \begin_inset space ~
23100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23102 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23106 was created using the menu
23108 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23109 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23115 arg "float-insert figure"
23119 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23122 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23128 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23132 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23133 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23135 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23137 \begin_inset space ~
23145 arg "layout-paragraph"
23151 \begin_layout Standard
23152 \begin_inset Float figure
23157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23159 \begin_inset Graphics
23160 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23170 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23173 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23175 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23179 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23192 \begin_layout Standard
23193 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23194 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23196 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23205 ) and refer to it using the menu
23207 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23213 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23217 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23218 vague references like
23219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23226 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23227 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23237 For more about cross-references, see section
23238 \begin_inset space ~
23242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23244 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23251 \begin_layout Standard
23252 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23253 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23254 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23255 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23256 as described in section
23257 \begin_inset space ~
23261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23263 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23269 \begin_inset space ~
23273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23275 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23279 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23280 You can also set the images one below the other.
23282 \begin_inset space ~
23286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23288 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23293 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23295 reference "fig:Platypus"
23299 are the subfigures.
23302 \begin_layout Standard
23303 \begin_inset Float figure
23308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23309 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23313 \begin_inset Float figure
23318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23322 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23324 name "fig:Undefinable"
23336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23337 \begin_inset Graphics
23338 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23349 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23353 \begin_inset Float figure
23358 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23359 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23362 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23364 name "fig:Platypus"
23376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23377 \begin_inset Graphics
23378 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23390 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23400 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23402 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23406 Two distorted images.
23419 \begin_layout Subsection
23421 \begin_inset Index idx
23424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23425 Floats ! Table floats
23433 \begin_layout Standard
23434 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23436 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23437 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23440 or the toolbar button
23443 arg "float-insert table"
23447 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23448 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23449 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23451 \begin_inset space ~
23455 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23457 reference "tab:Table-float"
23464 \begin_layout Standard
23465 \begin_inset Float table
23470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23471 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23474 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23476 name "tab:Table-float"
23488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23490 \begin_inset Tabular
23491 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23492 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23493 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23494 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23495 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23643 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23646 \end{array}\right]$
23654 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23667 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23688 \begin_layout Subsection
23690 \begin_inset Index idx
23693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 \begin_layout Standard
23704 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23705 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23706 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23708 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23716 \begin_inset space ~
23724 \begin_layout Section
23726 \begin_inset Index idx
23729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23738 \begin_layout Standard
23740 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23742 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23743 \begin_inset space \space{}
23750 \begin_layout Standard
23751 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23752 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23754 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23758 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23759 and its alignment within the page.
23762 \begin_layout Standard
23764 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23774 height_special "totalheight"
23779 backgroundcolor "none"
23782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23785 This is a minipage.
23786 The text is set in an italic style.
23789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23792 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23793 another formatting.
23801 \begin_layout Standard
23802 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23805 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23809 as described in section
23810 \begin_inset space ~
23814 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23816 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23821 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23827 \begin_layout Standard
23828 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23838 height_special "totalheight"
23843 backgroundcolor "none"
23846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23847 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23848 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23854 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23858 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23868 height_special "totalheight"
23873 backgroundcolor "none"
23876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23877 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23878 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23886 \begin_layout Standard
23887 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23893 \begin_layout Standard
23894 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23896 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23903 \begin_inset space ~
23911 \begin_layout Chapter
23912 Mathematical Formulas
23913 \begin_inset Index idx
23916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23923 \begin_inset Index idx
23926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23955 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23957 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23964 \begin_layout Standard
23965 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23970 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23973 \begin_layout Section
23975 \begin_inset Index idx
23978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23987 \begin_layout Standard
23988 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24001 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24003 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24004 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24005 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24007 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24013 \begin_layout Standard
24014 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24018 \begin_inset space ~
24023 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24026 \begin_layout Standard
24027 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24028 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24031 \begin_layout Standard
24032 This is a line with an inline formula
24033 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24039 \begin_layout Standard
24040 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24041 paragraph, like this one:
24042 \begin_inset Formula
24049 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24052 \begin_layout Standard
24054 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24056 For example, typing
24057 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24070 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24071 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24075 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24078 \begin_inset space ~
24086 \begin_layout Subsection
24087 Navigating in Formulas
24088 \begin_inset Index idx
24091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24100 \begin_layout Standard
24101 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24102 achieved with the arrow keys.
24104 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24105 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24110 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24111 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24115 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24119 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24122 \end{array}\right]$
24130 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24135 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24136 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24139 \begin_layout Standard
24144 , printed in this document as
24145 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24149 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24153 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24156 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24157 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24158 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24163 For example, if you want
24164 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24172 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24182 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24186 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24191 , since in the latter case only the
24194 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24199 will be under the square root sign:
24200 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24206 \begin_layout Standard
24207 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24209 \begin_inset Formula
24211 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24220 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24221 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24224 \begin_layout Subsection
24228 \begin_layout Standard
24229 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24230 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24234 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24235 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24236 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24237 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24238 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24242 \begin_layout Subsection
24243 Exponents and Subscripts
24244 \begin_inset Index idx
24247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24254 \begin_inset Index idx
24257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24266 \begin_layout Standard
24267 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24270 arg "math-superscript"
24276 arg "math-subscript"
24279 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24281 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24284 , type in a formula
24287 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24297 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24303 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24307 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24313 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24319 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24328 , you have to use an extra
24332 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24333 For example, if you want
24334 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24340 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24346 Subscripts are similar: To get
24347 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24353 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24361 \begin_layout Subsection
24363 \begin_inset Index idx
24366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24375 \begin_layout Standard
24376 Create a fraction either with the command
24382 or by using the icon
24385 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24391 \begin_inset space ~
24397 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24398 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24399 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24404 To move back up, press
24409 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24410 \begin_inset Formula
24412 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24415 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24423 \begin_layout Subsection
24425 \begin_inset Index idx
24428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24437 \begin_layout Standard
24438 Roots can be created using the
24441 \begin_inset space ~
24449 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24455 arg "math-insert \\root"
24477 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24483 always produces a square root.
24486 \begin_layout Subsection
24487 Operators with Limits
24488 \begin_inset Index idx
24491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24498 \begin_inset Index idx
24501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24510 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24517 \begin_layout Standard
24519 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24523 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24526 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24527 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24528 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24529 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24530 The sum operator will automatically place its
24531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24538 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24540 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24544 \begin_inset Formula
24546 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24551 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24555 \begin_layout Standard
24556 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24558 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24559 behind the operator and using the menu
24561 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24562 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24564 \begin_inset space ~
24568 \begin_inset space ~
24582 \begin_layout Standard
24583 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24584 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24588 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24592 \begin_inset Index idx
24595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24602 \begin_inset Formula
24604 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24609 which will place the
24610 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24622 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24623 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24629 \begin_layout Standard
24630 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24637 Have a look at section
24638 \begin_inset space ~
24642 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24644 reference "subsec:Functions"
24648 for an explanation of function macros.
24651 \begin_layout Subsection
24653 \begin_inset Index idx
24656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24665 \begin_layout Standard
24666 Most math symbols can be found in the
24669 \begin_inset space ~
24674 under one of several categories; including
24691 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24695 \begin_layout Standard
24696 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24697 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24698 don't have to use the
24701 \begin_inset space ~
24706 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24708 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24711 \begin_layout Subsection
24713 \begin_inset Index idx
24716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 \begin_layout Standard
24726 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24732 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24738 \begin_inset space ~
24746 arg "math-insert \\space"
24750 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24751 For example, the sequence
24756 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24759 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24761 \begin_inset Graphics
24762 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24767 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24768 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24769 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24770 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24771 , because they are negative
24773 Here are two examples:
24776 \begin_layout Standard
24786 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24792 \begin_layout Standard
24802 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24808 \begin_layout Subsection
24810 \begin_inset Index idx
24813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24822 name "subsec:Functions"
24829 \begin_layout Standard
24833 \begin_inset space ~
24838 contains under the button
24841 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24844 a number of function macros, such as
24845 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24849 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24857 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24864 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24865 avoid confusions, because
24866 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24870 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24876 \begin_layout Standard
24877 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24879 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24883 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24889 \begin_layout Standard
24890 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24891 are placed, as described in section
24892 \begin_inset space ~
24896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24898 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24905 \begin_layout Subsection
24907 \begin_inset Index idx
24910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24919 \begin_layout Standard
24920 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24922 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24923 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24924 commands, for example, to enter
24925 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24928 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24929 Our example is entered by typing
24934 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24941 \begin_inset space ~
24945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24947 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24951 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24954 \begin_layout Standard
24955 \begin_inset Float table
24960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24961 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24966 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24970 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24980 \begin_inset Tabular
24981 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24982 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24983 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24984 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24985 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25025 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25069 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25123 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25151 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25177 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25231 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25241 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25272 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25285 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25295 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25326 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25339 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25380 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25393 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25447 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25501 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25533 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25546 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25567 \begin_layout Standard
25568 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25571 \begin_inset space ~
25579 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25582 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25586 \begin_layout Section
25587 Brackets and Delimiters
25588 \begin_inset Index idx
25591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25598 \begin_inset Index idx
25601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25608 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25610 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25617 \begin_layout Standard
25618 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25620 For some purposes, using just the keys
25625 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25626 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25627 toolbar delimiter icon
25630 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25634 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25635 \begin_inset Formula
25637 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25645 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25646 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25650 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25653 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25659 \begin_inset Formula
25661 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25669 \begin_layout Standard
25670 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25671 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25675 \begin_layout Standard
25676 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25677 left side and right side.
25678 If you use the option
25681 \begin_inset space ~
25686 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25687 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25689 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25694 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25695 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25698 \begin_layout Standard
25699 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25700 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25701 is to go inside the brackets.
25702 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25707 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25708 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25709 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25713 arg "math-delim ( )"
25719 \begin_layout Section
25720 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25721 \begin_inset Index idx
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25731 \begin_inset Index idx
25734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 \begin_inset Index idx
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25753 \begin_layout Standard
25754 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25758 \begin_inset space ~
25766 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25770 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25771 Here is an example:
25772 \begin_inset Formula
25774 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25783 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25784 \begin_inset space ~
25788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25790 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25795 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25796 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25797 This alignment is set in the box
25802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25826 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25834 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25840 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25851 for every column as default.
25852 For example, the sequence
25853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25864 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25865 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25866 corresponds to the relevant column.
25867 The result will look like this:
25868 \begin_inset Formula
25871 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25872 column & has & has\,right\\
25873 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25882 \begin_layout Standard
25883 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25886 arg "newline-insert newline"
25889 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25890 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25892 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25895 or the math toolbar.
25898 \begin_layout Standard
25899 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25900 It can be created with the menu
25902 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25903 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25905 \begin_inset space ~
25917 Here is an example:
25918 \begin_inset Formula
25932 \begin_layout Standard
25933 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25936 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25939 arg "newline-insert newline"
25943 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25948 arg "newline-insert newline"
25951 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25952 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25959 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25960 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25961 A new row is created by every further entry of
25964 arg "newline-insert newline"
25968 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25969 Here is an example:
25970 \begin_inset Formula
25972 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25973 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25978 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25979 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25980 \begin_inset Formula
25982 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25990 \begin_layout Standard
25991 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25998 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25999 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26000 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26002 reference "eq:asquared"
26007 The other types are described in section
26008 \begin_inset space ~
26012 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26014 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26021 \begin_layout Section
26022 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26023 \begin_inset Index idx
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26027 Math ! Formula numbering
26033 \begin_inset Index idx
26036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26037 Math ! Referencing formulas
26043 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26045 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26052 \begin_layout Standard
26053 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26055 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26056 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26058 \begin_inset space ~
26062 \begin_inset space ~
26070 arg "math-number-toggle"
26074 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26075 within parentheses.
26076 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26077 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26078 the document class.
26079 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26080 separated by a dot:
26081 \begin_inset Formula
26091 arg "math-number-toggle"
26094 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26095 You can only number displayed formulas.
26098 \begin_layout Standard
26099 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26101 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26102 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26104 \begin_inset space ~
26108 \begin_inset space ~
26116 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26119 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26120 \begin_inset Formula
26123 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26129 To number all lines use the shortcut
26132 arg "math-number-toggle"
26138 \begin_layout Standard
26139 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26142 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26143 A label is inserted with the menu
26145 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26154 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26155 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26156 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26168 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26169 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26170 We inserted in the following example the label
26171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26175 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26178 in the second line:
26179 \begin_inset Formula
26181 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26182 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26187 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26188 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26189 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26193 \begin_inset space ~
26201 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26205 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26206 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26207 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26208 as the formula number:
26211 \begin_layout Standard
26212 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26213 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26215 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26222 \begin_layout Standard
26223 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26224 's cross-reference box are described in section
26225 \begin_inset space ~
26229 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26231 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26236 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26244 \begin_layout Section
26245 User defined math macros
26246 \begin_inset Index idx
26249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26258 \begin_layout Standard
26260 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26261 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26262 Math macros are explained in section
26265 \begin_inset space ~
26277 \begin_layout Section
26281 \begin_layout Subsection
26283 \begin_inset Index idx
26286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 \begin_layout Standard
26296 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26297 To set a font in a formula, use the
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26308 arg "math-insert \\font"
26311 , or enter its command, listed in table
26312 \begin_inset space ~
26316 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26318 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26325 \begin_layout Standard
26326 \begin_inset Float table
26331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26332 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26337 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26341 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26351 \begin_inset Tabular
26352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26353 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26377 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26380 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26387 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26414 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26441 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26449 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26474 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26497 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26501 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26528 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26536 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26562 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26589 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26623 \begin_layout Standard
26624 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26632 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26648 \begin_layout Standard
26649 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26650 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26655 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26656 space when you need a space in the box.
26657 Here is an example where
26658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26669 denotes the set of numbers:
26670 \begin_inset Formula
26672 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26680 \begin_layout Standard
26681 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26682 You can, for example, put a character in
26691 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26695 \begin_inset Newline newline
26698 So it is better not to use this feature.
26701 \begin_layout Standard
26702 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26703 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26707 \begin_inset Newline newline
26710 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26716 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26717 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26723 \begin_layout Standard
26730 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26733 \begin_layout Standard
26734 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26736 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26737 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26739 \begin_inset space ~
26747 \begin_layout Subsection
26749 \begin_inset Index idx
26752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26761 \begin_layout Standard
26762 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26764 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26768 \begin_inset space ~
26772 \begin_inset space ~
26780 \begin_inset space ~
26788 arg "math-insert \\font"
26792 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26793 in black instead of blue.
26794 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26795 Here is an example:
26796 \begin_inset Formula
26799 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26800 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26809 \begin_layout Subsection
26811 \begin_inset Index idx
26814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26823 \begin_layout Standard
26824 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26825 automatically chosen in most situations.
26843 For most characters,
26851 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26852 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26857 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26858 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26859 thinks are appropriate.
26860 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26863 arg "math-insert \\style"
26867 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26868 For example, you can set
26869 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26872 , which is normally in
26881 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26885 The four styles are used in the following example:
26888 \begin_layout Standard
26889 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26893 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26897 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26901 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26907 \begin_layout Standard
26908 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26909 is set in a particular size with the menu
26911 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26913 \begin_inset space ~
26918 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26919 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26920 will be adjusted to correspond.
26921 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26932 \begin_layout Standard
26936 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26942 \begin_layout Section
26943 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26945 \begin_inset Index idx
26948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26955 \begin_inset Index idx
26958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26967 \begin_layout Standard
26969 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26970 that are in common use.
26973 \begin_layout Subsection
26974 Enabling AMS-Support
26977 \begin_layout Standard
26978 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26979 the document by selecting the checkbox
26982 \begin_inset space ~
26986 \begin_inset space ~
26990 \begin_inset space ~
26997 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27001 \begin_inset Index idx
27004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27005 Document ! Settings
27013 \begin_inset space ~
27019 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27020 -errors in formulas,
27021 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27024 \begin_layout Subsection
27026 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27028 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27033 \begin_inset Index idx
27036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27037 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27045 \begin_layout Standard
27046 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27047 provides a selection of different formula types.
27049 allows you to choose between
27070 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27071 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27078 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27081 \begin_layout Chapter
27085 \begin_layout Section
27087 \begin_inset Index idx
27090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27099 name "sec:Cross-References"
27106 \begin_layout Standard
27107 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27108 's strengths is cross-references.
27109 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27111 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27112 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27113 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27116 \begin_layout Enumerate
27120 \begin_layout Enumerate
27121 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27123 name "enu:Second-item"
27130 \begin_layout Enumerate
27134 \begin_layout Standard
27135 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27140 or by pressing the toolbar button
27147 A gray label box like this:
27148 \begin_inset Graphics
27149 filename clipart/label.png
27153 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27155 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27157 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27182 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27186 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27190 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27191 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27207 \begin_layout Standard
27208 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27210 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27213 or the toolbar button
27216 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27220 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27221 \begin_inset Graphics
27222 filename clipart/reference.png
27226 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27228 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27237 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27241 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27245 \begin_layout Standard
27246 As an alternative to
27248 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27251 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27256 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27257 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27271 \begin_layout Standard
27272 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27273 \begin_inset space ~
27277 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27279 reference "enu:Second-item"
27286 \begin_layout Standard
27287 It is recommended to use a protected space
27291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27292 described in section
27293 \begin_inset space ~
27297 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27299 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27308 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27309 line breaks between them.
27312 \begin_layout Standard
27313 There are six formats of cross-references:
27316 \begin_layout Description
27317 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27320 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27327 \begin_layout Description
27328 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27329 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27335 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27339 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27341 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27348 \begin_layout Description
27349 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27350 \begin_inset space ~
27354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27355 LatexCommand pageref
27356 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27363 \begin_layout Description
27365 \begin_inset space ~
27369 \begin_inset space ~
27372 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27374 LatexCommand vpageref
27375 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27380 \begin_inset Newline newline
27383 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27384 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27385 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27386 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27387 it prints “on the next page”.
27388 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27391 \begin_layout Description
27393 \begin_inset space ~
27397 \begin_inset space ~
27401 \begin_inset space ~
27404 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27407 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27412 \begin_inset Newline newline
27415 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27421 ; otherwise it behaves like
27425 \begin_inset space ~
27429 \begin_inset space ~
27438 \begin_layout Description
27440 \begin_inset space ~
27443 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27444 \begin_inset Newline newline
27448 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27456 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27466 \begin_inset Index idx
27469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 -packages ! prettyref
27477 \begin_inset Index idx
27480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27482 -packages ! refstyle
27493 \begin_inset Newline newline
27496 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27497 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27500 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27504 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27505 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27513 is the default and preferred because
27517 supports only English documents.
27518 The format is specified by using the command
27530 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27531 preamble of the document.
27532 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27534 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27546 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27554 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27558 \begin_inset Newline newline
27565 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27568 \change_inserted 424524441 1484857490
27572 \begin_inset Newline newline
27575 Please note that neither
27583 (nor \SpecialChar LyX
27584 itself) predefines reference formats for all available types.
27585 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27587 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27588 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27593 , you might do so as follows:
27594 \begin_inset Newline newline
27601 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27608 \begin_inset Newline newline
27611 For more information about
27612 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843645
27613 defining formatted references
27614 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843647
27617 , have a look at the package documentation
27618 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843659
27622 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27624 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27630 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27632 \begin_inset Newline newline
27635 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27636 references only if you are using the
27641 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27644 \begin_layout Description
27646 \begin_inset space ~
27649 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27650 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27651 LatexCommand nameref
27652 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27657 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27661 \begin_layout Description
27663 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27665 \begin_inset space ~
27668 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27669 label for the reference.
27670 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27671 that LyX does not support.
27676 , then you may want to use the
27677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27684 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27690 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27694 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27699 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27703 \begin_layout Standard
27704 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27705 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27707 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27711 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27715 \begin_layout Standard
27716 You can only use the style
27720 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27724 is always possible.
27727 \begin_layout Standard
27728 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27729 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27731 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27732 \begin_inset space ~
27736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27738 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27745 \begin_layout Standard
27746 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27750 \begin_inset space ~
27754 \begin_inset space ~
27759 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27760 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27763 \begin_inset space ~
27768 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27769 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27772 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27778 \begin_layout Standard
27779 You can change labels at any time.
27780 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27781 do not need to think about this.
27784 \begin_layout Standard
27785 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27787 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27791 \begin_layout Standard
27792 References are described in detail in the section
27793 \begin_inset space ~
27803 \begin_inset space ~
27809 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27813 \begin_layout Standard
27815 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27816 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27821 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27826 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27832 \begin_inset Index idx
27835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27837 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27839 -packages ! refstyle
27849 \begin_inset Index idx
27852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27856 -packages ! prettyref
27861 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27862 's possible label shortcuts
27866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27868 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27869 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27873 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27876 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27877 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27882 and is not internationalized.
27892 \begin_layout Section
27893 Table of Contents and other Listings
27894 \begin_inset Index idx
27897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27904 \begin_inset Index idx
27907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27908 Navigating ! Outline
27914 \begin_inset Index idx
27917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27924 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27933 \begin_layout Subsection
27935 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27937 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27944 \begin_layout Standard
27945 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27947 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27948 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27950 \begin_inset space ~
27954 \begin_inset space ~
27960 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27962 If you click on it, the
27966 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27967 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27968 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27970 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27972 \begin_inset space ~
27977 that is described in section
27978 \begin_inset space ~
27982 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27984 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27991 \begin_layout Standard
27992 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27993 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27995 \begin_inset space ~
27999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28001 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
28005 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
28007 \begin_inset space ~
28011 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28013 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
28017 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
28019 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
28022 \begin_layout Subsection
28023 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28026 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28033 \begin_layout Standard
28034 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28036 You can insert them via the
28038 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28042 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28045 \begin_layout Section
28046 URLs and Hyperlinks
28047 \begin_inset Index idx
28050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28057 \begin_inset Index idx
28060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28069 \begin_layout Subsection
28071 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28080 \begin_layout Standard
28081 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28083 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28089 \begin_layout Standard
28090 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28092 \begin_inset Flex URL
28095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28105 \begin_layout Standard
28106 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28112 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28116 \begin_layout Standard
28117 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28125 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28134 \begin_layout Subsection
28136 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28138 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28145 \begin_layout Standard
28146 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28148 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28151 or with the toolbar button
28158 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28167 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28168 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28169 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28171 name "LyX's homepage"
28172 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28177 , an Email address like this:
28178 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28180 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28181 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28187 , or a link to a file.
28190 \begin_layout Standard
28191 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28201 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28204 to the link target.
28207 \begin_layout Standard
28208 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28209 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28210 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28211 the text style dialog.
28212 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28216 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28218 name "LyX's homepage"
28219 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28227 \begin_layout Standard
28228 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28232 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28234 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28235 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28239 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28241 \begin_inset Newline newline
28249 \begin_inset Newline newline
28256 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28259 \begin_layout Section
28261 \begin_inset Index idx
28264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28271 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28273 name "sec:Appendices"
28280 \begin_layout Standard
28281 Appendices are created with the menu
28283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28285 \begin_inset space ~
28289 \begin_inset space ~
28295 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28296 as the appendix part of the book.
28297 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28300 \begin_layout Standard
28301 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28302 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28303 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28304 and the subsection number.
28305 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28309 \begin_layout Standard
28311 \begin_inset space ~
28315 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28317 reference "chap:Credits"
28322 \begin_inset space ~
28326 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28328 reference "subsec:Export"
28335 \begin_layout Section
28337 \begin_inset Index idx
28340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28347 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28349 name "sec:Bibliography"
28356 \begin_layout Standard
28357 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28359 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28361 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28365 You can include a bibliography database,
28366 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28372 Known under the name
28373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28376 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28388 which is explained in
28389 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28390 the next subsection
28391 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28393 \begin_inset space ~
28397 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28399 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28408 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28414 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28416 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28420 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28424 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28428 \begin_inset space ~
28432 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28434 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28439 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28443 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28445 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28447 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28450 author-year citations,
28451 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28452 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28455 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28457 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28458 should seriously consider
28465 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28467 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28470 a bibliography database.
28471 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28475 \begin_layout Standard
28477 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28478 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28479 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28483 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28484 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28485 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28486 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28487 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28492 \begin_layout Subsection
28494 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28497 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28503 The Bibliography Environment
28506 \begin_layout Standard
28511 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28513 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28522 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28525 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28526 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28527 of ASCII characters only.
28530 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28533 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28537 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28540 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28541 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28545 \begin_layout Standard
28546 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28548 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28551 or the toolbar button
28554 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28558 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28559 containing the available citations.
28560 Select one or more keys from the list and
28570 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28571 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28575 \begin_layout Standard
28576 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28577 entry with surrounding brackets.
28582 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28583 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28595 \begin_layout Standard
28599 Companion Second Edition
28602 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28604 key "latexcompanion"
28612 \begin_layout Standard
28613 The \SpecialChar LyX
28614 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28615 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28623 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28627 \begin_layout Standard
28629 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28630 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28635 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28640 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28644 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28647 Author A and Author B(Year)
28648 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28655 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28657 Then, if you select
28663 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28667 \begin_inset Index idx
28670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28672 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28673 Document ! Settings
28680 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28686 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28693 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28698 \begin_layout Standard
28699 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28704 \begin_inset space ~
28712 arg "layout-paragraph"
28716 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28719 \begin_layout Subsection
28720 Bibliography databases
28721 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28722 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28726 \begin_inset Index idx
28729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 Bibliography ! Databases
28736 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28738 \begin_inset Index idx
28741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28742 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28751 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28753 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28760 \begin_layout Standard
28761 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28762 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28764 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28767 in different documents.
28771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28772 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28774 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28775 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28780 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28782 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28783 your working field in a database.
28784 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28785 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28786 list for that document.
28787 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28791 \begin_layout Standard
28792 The database is a text file with the file extension
28793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28804 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28805 The format is explained in
28806 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28813 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28815 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28817 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28823 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28824 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28825 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28827 \begin_inset Flex URL
28830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28832 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28838 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28842 \begin_layout Standard
28844 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28846 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28847 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28848 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28850 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28851 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28852 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28854 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28863 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28864 (although it has been significantly
28865 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28872 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28877 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28878 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28879 might conversely fail to correctly
28880 handle databases that use specific
28891 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28895 \begin_layout Standard
28897 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28898 Both approaches are described in turn.
28901 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28903 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28904 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28906 \begin_inset Index idx
28909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28911 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28912 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28923 \begin_layout Standard
28925 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28927 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28931 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28932 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28942 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28944 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28948 \begin_inset space ~
28954 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28955 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28956 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28957 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28967 Add bibliography to TOC
28969 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28974 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28975 in the document or just the cited references.
28978 \begin_layout Standard
28980 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28981 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28984 style file is a text file with the file extension
28985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28993 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28996 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28997 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28998 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28999 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
29001 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
29006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29007 For information on how this is done, have a look at
29008 \begin_inset Newline newline
29012 \begin_inset CommandInset href
29014 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
29025 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
29026 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29031 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29037 \begin_layout Standard
29038 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29039 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
29043 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29045 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
29047 \begin_inset Index idx
29050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29052 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
29053 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29061 \begin_layout Standard
29063 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
29064 Accessing a database via
29068 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29071 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29076 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29078 \begin_inset space ~
29084 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29085 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29087 you cannot select a
29091 file (we will explain later, why).
29092 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29095 Add bibliography to TOC
29097 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29102 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29103 in the document or just the cited references.
29106 \begin_layout Standard
29108 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29113 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29126 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29136 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29139 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29140 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29141 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29142 bibliography style.
29145 \begin_layout Standard
29147 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29152 styles are not set in the
29155 \begin_inset space ~
29166 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29167 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29171 However, in the former dialog (in the
29175 field which is only visible if you use
29179 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29180 (for instance concerning its heading).
29181 These options are detailed in the
29186 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29198 \begin_layout Standard
29200 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29201 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29202 \begin_inset space ~
29206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29208 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29218 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29220 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29221 Bibliography Processors
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29225 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29227 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29228 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29229 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29234 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29236 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29240 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29246 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29247 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29251 \begin_layout Standard
29253 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29254 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29256 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29257 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29258 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29263 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29264 do this on a general level in
29266 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29267 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29268 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29271 , or for individual documents
29272 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29273 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29283 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29285 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29290 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29291 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29292 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29298 The following variants are
29299 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29301 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29302 available by default
29307 \begin_layout Description
29309 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29310 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29314 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29322 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29323 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29324 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29329 \begin_inset space \space{}
29336 ), only with the package
29339 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29342 and many specific features
29349 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29350 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29352 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29357 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29366 \begin_layout Description
29367 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29368 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29369 with all bibliography packages,
29370 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29372 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29376 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29377 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29378 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29380 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29386 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29389 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29394 \begin_layout Description
29395 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29396 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29397 (but no Unicode support)
29399 , larger memory than
29403 , works with all bibliography packages
29404 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29405 , although more complex
29409 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29413 features are supported.
29416 \begin_layout Standard
29418 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29420 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29427 bibliography processor set in
29429 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29430 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29434 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29438 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29441 bibliography processor in
29443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29444 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29445 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29448 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29449 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29458 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29459 -based bibliography styles).
29460 This should suit most needs.
29465 \begin_layout Standard
29467 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29468 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29469 By default, this is
29477 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29478 You can adjust it in
29480 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29481 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29482 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29490 \begin_layout Standard
29492 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29493 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29495 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29496 Selected bibliography processors
29498 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29499 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29500 specification of the variants
29501 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29505 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29507 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29511 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29514 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29516 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29522 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29524 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29532 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29544 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29548 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29550 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29556 \begin_layout Standard
29558 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29560 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29563 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29564 When you select the option
29566 Sectioned bibliography
29570 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29571 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29574 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29578 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29580 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29584 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29588 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29591 are explained in detail in section
29593 Customizing Bibliographies
29597 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29602 Additional Features
29607 \begin_layout Standard
29609 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29610 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29611 the two methods of creating them.
29612 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29613 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29614 We used the style file
29618 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29623 \begin_layout Subsection
29625 \begin_inset Index idx
29628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29629 Bibliography ! Citation format
29635 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29639 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29648 \begin_layout Standard
29650 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29651 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29652 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29656 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29658 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29662 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29665 ) or author-year citations (as
29666 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29675 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29679 \begin_layout Standard
29681 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29682 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29689 \begin_inset Index idx
29692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29694 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29695 Document ! Settings
29702 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29705 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29706 bibliography approach.
29709 \begin_layout Standard
29711 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29716 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29721 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29723 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29725 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29732 \begin_layout Standard
29734 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29735 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29743 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29751 Currently, the following options are available:
29754 \begin_layout Itemize
29756 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29763 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29767 \begin_layout Itemize
29769 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29778 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29780 Biblatex citation style
29784 Biblatex bibliography style
29787 Many different style variants are supported.
29792 package can be entered in the
29799 \begin_layout Itemize
29801 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29804 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29811 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29814 natbib compatibility mode
29815 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29819 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29824 (see below) or want to emulate
29828 behavior very closely.
29833 , this option has some additional styles.
29834 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29839 styles are also supported by this variant.
29842 \begin_layout Itemize
29844 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29853 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29856 \begin_layout Itemize
29858 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29867 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29872 \begin_layout Standard
29874 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29883 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29885 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29890 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29892 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29893 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29910 , a suitable style is proposed).
29915 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29919 \begin_layout Standard
29921 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29922 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29924 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29926 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29929 n the citation reference dialog
29930 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29931 you can set a special citation format
29935 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29936 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29937 a name prefix such as
29938 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29942 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29950 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29953 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29957 e., use or don't use
29958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29967 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29968 For this feature you need to enable the option
29974 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29978 \begin_inset Index idx
29981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29982 Document ! Settings
29992 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29993 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29994 style files as explained in
29995 the previous section.
30000 \begin_layout Standard
30002 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
30003 In the citation dialog,
30004 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
30006 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
30009 ou can also set text to appear
30010 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
30013 after a citation reference,
30014 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
30015 in the citation reference window
30016 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
30018 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30022 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
30024 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30029 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30033 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30040 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
30042 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
30045 example where the text
30046 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30050 \begin_inset space ~
30054 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30057 appears after the reference:
30060 \begin_layout Quote
30062 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30065 key "latexcompanion"
30071 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
30075 \begin_layout Standard
30077 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998090
30078 All styles except for
30082 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30091 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30095 \begin_layout Standard
30097 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
30098 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30099 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
30100 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
30106 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
30107 in a multi-citation (so-called
30108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30111 qualified citation lists
30112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30118 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
30120 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30124 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30127 window will display three columns:
30128 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30152 If you double-click on an item's
30153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30168 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30173 General text before
30174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30178 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30182 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30185 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30190 \begin_layout Section
30192 \begin_inset Index idx
30195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30202 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30211 \begin_layout Standard
30212 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30214 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30216 \begin_inset space ~
30221 or the toolbar button
30228 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30229 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30230 by \SpecialChar LyX
30231 as the index entry.
30234 \begin_layout Standard
30235 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30237 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30238 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30240 \begin_inset space ~
30246 A light blue box labeled
30247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30258 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30259 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30263 \begin_layout Standard
30264 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30265 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30266 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30267 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30269 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30271 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30279 \begin_layout Subsection
30280 Grouping Index Entries
30281 \begin_inset Index idx
30284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30293 \begin_layout Standard
30294 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30296 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30297 lists under the entry
30298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30306 First we create the entry
30307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30311 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30315 \begin_inset space ~
30319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30321 reference "subsec:Lists"
30326 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30327 \begin_inset space ~
30331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30333 reference "sec:Itemize"
30337 , we insert the command
30340 \begin_layout Standard
30346 \begin_layout Standard
30350 \begin_layout Standard
30356 \begin_layout Standard
30357 for the enumerated list in section
30358 \begin_inset space ~
30362 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30364 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30371 \begin_layout Standard
30372 The exclamation mark
30373 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30377 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30380 marks the grouping levels.
30381 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30382 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30383 If we don't have an index entry for
30384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30391 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30394 \begin_layout Subsection
30396 \begin_inset Index idx
30399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30400 Index ! Page ranges
30408 \begin_layout Standard
30409 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30411 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30412 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30413 an index entry in section
30414 \begin_inset space ~
30418 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30420 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30427 \begin_layout Standard
30430 Paragraph environments|(
30433 \begin_layout Standard
30434 and another entry at the end of section
30435 \begin_inset space ~
30439 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30441 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30448 \begin_layout Standard
30451 Paragraph environments|)
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30456 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30476 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30479 respectively start and end the index range.
30480 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30481 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30482 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30483 An example is the index entry
30484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30487 Document ! Settings
30488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30494 \begin_layout Subsection
30496 \begin_inset Index idx
30499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30500 Index ! Cross referencing
30508 \begin_layout Standard
30509 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30510 We referred for example in the index entry
30511 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30515 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30519 \begin_inset space ~
30523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30525 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30529 ) to the index entry
30530 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30534 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30537 in the same section using the entry
30540 \begin_layout Standard
30543 GIF|see{Image formats}
30546 \begin_layout Standard
30547 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30549 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30550 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30553 \begin_layout Subsection
30555 \begin_inset Index idx
30558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30559 Index ! Entry order
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30568 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30569 follow the rules for the index order.
30570 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30576 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30578 \begin_inset space ~
30582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30584 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30593 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30594 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30619 \begin_inset Index idx
30622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30623 Dummy entries ! maïs
30629 \begin_inset Index idx
30632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30633 Dummy entries ! maître
30639 \begin_inset Index idx
30642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30643 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30648 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30649 maïs, maison, maître.
30650 To achieve this, we use the command
30653 \begin_layout Standard
30656 previous entry@current entry
30659 \begin_layout Standard
30660 In our case we want to have
30661 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30676 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30679 \begin_layout Standard
30685 \begin_layout Standard
30686 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30687 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30689 See the next subsection for an example.
30692 \begin_layout Standard
30693 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30699 \begin_layout Standard
30700 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30705 to generate the index (see section
30706 \begin_inset space ~
30710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30712 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30721 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30722 -package aeguill in section
30723 \begin_inset space ~
30727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30729 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30733 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30734 -packages although all these index
30735 commands start with
30736 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30749 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30754 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30757 \begin_layout Standard
30769 \begin_layout Standard
30781 \begin_layout Subsection
30783 \begin_inset Index idx
30786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30787 Index ! Entry layout
30795 \begin_layout Standard
30796 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30797 \begin_inset Index idx
30800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30803 This is an italic dummy entry
30808 You can also format the page number using the character
30809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30816 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30817 -command without a backslash.
30818 We can write for example
30821 \begin_layout Standard
30824 italic page number:|textit
30827 \begin_layout Standard
30828 to get the page number in italic.
30829 \begin_inset Index idx
30832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30833 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30838 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30839 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30849 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30863 Have a look at section
30864 \begin_inset space ~
30868 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30870 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30874 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30878 \begin_layout Standard
30879 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30887 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30891 to generate the index, see section
30892 \begin_inset space ~
30896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30898 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30907 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30912 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30913 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30916 key "latexcompanion"
30929 \begin_layout Standard
30930 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30932 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30933 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30934 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30935 If so, put the following in the preamble
30938 \begin_layout Standard
30950 \begin_layout Standard
30954 \begin_layout Standard
30960 \begin_layout Standard
30961 in the index entry.
30962 \begin_inset Index idx
30965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30966 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30971 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30972 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30973 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30976 \begin_layout Standard
30977 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30978 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30979 a bold font for all index entries.
30980 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30992 documentation for details,
30993 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30995 key "makeindex,xindy"
31003 \begin_layout Subsection
31005 \begin_inset Index idx
31008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31015 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31017 name "subsec:Index-Program"
31024 \begin_layout Standard
31025 If the index generation program
31029 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
31030 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
31034 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31035 distribution, is used.
31039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31044 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31045 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31046 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31047 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31048 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31058 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31060 dialog, see section
31061 \begin_inset space ~
31065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31067 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31072 The available options are listed and explained in
31073 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31075 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31081 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31085 \begin_layout Standard
31086 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31087 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31090 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31091 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31095 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31096 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31099 \begin_layout Subsection
31103 \begin_layout Standard
31104 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31105 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31113 next to the standard index.
31115 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31116 that add this feature.
31123 \begin_inset Index idx
31126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31128 -packages ! splitidx
31133 package to generate multiple indexes.
31134 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31140 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31142 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31150 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31151 style, but it also includes
31152 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31153 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31161 \begin_layout Standard
31162 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31163 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31169 and select the option
31171 Use multiple Indexes
31178 already contains the standard index
31179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31187 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31188 also appear as a heading) to the
31192 input field and press the
31197 The new index now also appears in the list.
31198 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31199 label color to the new index.
31202 \begin_layout Standard
31203 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31206 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31213 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31214 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31215 are additional features:
31218 \begin_layout Itemize
31219 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31220 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31223 \begin_layout Itemize
31224 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31225 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31230 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31233 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31234 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31235 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31236 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31239 \begin_layout Section
31240 Nomenclature/Glossary
31241 \begin_inset Index idx
31244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31251 \begin_inset Index idx
31254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31283 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31285 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31292 \begin_layout Standard
31293 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31294 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31295 called nomenclature or glossary.
31298 \begin_layout Standard
31299 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31306 \begin_inset Index idx
31309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31311 -packages ! nomencl
31317 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31319 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31326 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31330 \begin_layout Standard
31331 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31332 and then use the menu
31334 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31340 \begin_inset space ~
31345 or the toolbar button
31348 arg "nomencl-insert"
31353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31364 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31367 \begin_layout Standard
31368 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31369 The first is the term or
31373 that you wish to define.
31378 of the term or symbol.
31381 \begin_layout Standard
31382 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31390 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31391 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31399 \begin_layout Subsection
31400 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31401 \begin_inset Index idx
31404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31405 Nomenclature ! Layout
31413 \begin_layout Standard
31414 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31418 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31425 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31433 \begin_inset Newline newline
31441 \begin_inset Newline newline
31447 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31454 character starts/ends the formula.
31455 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31456 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31458 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31464 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31468 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31478 \begin_layout Standard
31479 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31480 -syntax is given in section
31481 \begin_inset space ~
31485 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31487 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31498 \begin_inset space ~
31503 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31505 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31506 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31510 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31517 in this document is:
31518 \begin_inset Newline newline
31523 dummy entry for the character
31528 \begin_inset Newline newline
31540 \begin_inset space ~
31550 font use the command
31579 \begin_layout Standard
31580 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31581 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31585 \begin_inset space \space{}
31589 \begin_inset Newline newline
31605 \begin_inset Newline newline
31608 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31609 This command will make the font of all symbols
31616 \begin_inset space ~
31624 \begin_layout Standard
31625 If the characters |
31626 \begin_inset space \space{}
31630 \begin_inset space \space{}
31634 \begin_inset space \space{}
31638 \begin_inset space \space{}
31642 \begin_inset space \space{}
31645 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31646 a quote character in front of them.
31647 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31648 LatexCommand nomenclature
31649 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31650 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31658 \begin_layout Subsection
31659 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31660 \begin_inset Index idx
31663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31664 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31672 \begin_layout Standard
31673 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31674 -code of the symbol
31676 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31678 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31681 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31682 LatexCommand nomenclature
31684 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31692 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31696 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31697 LatexCommand nomenclature
31700 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31706 They will be sorted by
31707 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31733 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31736 will be sorted before the
31740 since the character
31741 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31745 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31748 is considered in sorting.
31751 \begin_layout Standard
31752 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31755 \begin_inset space ~
31760 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31761 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31763 For the example given, you can insert
31767 in this field for the
31768 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31775 will be located before
31776 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31782 \begin_layout Standard
31783 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31788 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31798 \begin_layout Subsection
31799 Nomenclature Options
31800 \begin_inset Index idx
31803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31804 Nomenclature ! Options
31812 \begin_layout Standard
31817 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31818 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31821 \begin_layout Description
31822 refeq Appends the phrase
31823 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31838 to every nomenclature entry, where
31844 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31847 \begin_layout Description
31848 refpage Appends the phrase
31849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31864 to every nomenclature entry, where
31870 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31873 \begin_layout Description
31874 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31877 \begin_layout Standard
31878 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31879 class options list in the
31881 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31885 In this document the options
31892 \begin_layout Standard
31893 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31899 \begin_layout Standard
31900 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31901 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31906 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31909 \begin_layout Description
31919 \begin_layout Description
31922 nomrefpage Like the
31929 \begin_layout Description
31932 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31941 \begin_layout Description
31945 \begin_inset space ~
31951 \begin_inset space ~
31956 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31959 \begin_layout Standard
31961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31968 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31969 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31973 \begin_layout Standard
31981 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31984 \begin_inset Newline newline
31991 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31996 \begin_inset Newline newline
32000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32008 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32015 by their translation.
32018 \begin_layout Subsection
32019 Printing the Nomenclature
32020 \begin_inset Index idx
32023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32024 Nomenclature ! Printing
32032 \begin_layout Standard
32033 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
32035 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32036 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32049 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32052 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32053 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32054 You can choose between these settings:
32057 \begin_layout Description
32058 Default a space of 1
32059 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32065 \begin_layout Description
32067 \begin_inset space ~
32071 \begin_inset space ~
32074 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32077 \begin_layout Description
32078 Custom custom space
32081 \begin_layout Standard
32082 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32083 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32087 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32091 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32099 For example, in order to change the name to
32103 , add the following line to the preamble:
32106 \begin_layout Standard
32114 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32117 \begin_layout Subsection
32118 Nomenclature Program
32119 \begin_inset Index idx
32122 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32123 Nomenclature ! Program
32129 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32131 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32138 \begin_layout Standard
32144 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32145 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32147 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32152 by adding options, see section
32153 \begin_inset space ~
32157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32159 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32164 The available options are listed and explained in
32165 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32167 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32175 \begin_layout Section
32177 \begin_inset Index idx
32180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32187 \begin_inset Index idx
32190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32191 Document ! Branches
32197 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32199 name "sec:Branches"
32206 \begin_layout Standard
32207 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32208 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32209 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32210 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32213 \begin_layout Standard
32214 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32215 allows you to put text into branches.
32216 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32217 To create a branch, either select the menu
32219 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32220 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32223 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32232 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32233 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32234 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32235 and whether the name of the branch should
32236 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32237 (see below for an example).
32238 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32239 to the name of the other) and to add
32240 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32244 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32248 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32252 \begin_inset space ~
32255 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32256 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32259 \begin_layout Standard
32260 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32261 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32263 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32266 where you can choose a branch.
32267 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32271 \begin_layout Standard
32272 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32273 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32276 \begin_layout Standard
32277 \begin_inset Branch Question
32281 \begin_layout Standard
32282 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32290 \begin_layout Standard
32291 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32295 \begin_layout Standard
32296 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32304 \begin_layout Standard
32311 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32312 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32315 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32316 Consider for example a file
32317 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32324 which has the above branches.
32326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32330 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32333 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32334 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32338 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32342 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32346 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32350 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32354 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32357 branch were inactive,
32358 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32362 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32373 branch was active, likewise
32374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32382 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32389 branch was active, and
32390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32393 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32397 if both branches were active.
32398 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32399 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32403 \begin_layout Standard
32405 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32406 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32414 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32420 \begin_inset Branch Question
32424 \begin_layout Standard
32426 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32427 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32435 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32436 To control whether a particular inset is
32437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32444 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32451 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32457 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32461 \begin_layout Standard
32462 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32468 \begin_layout Standard
32469 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32470 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32471 definitions for each branch.
32472 For example you can define for the question branch
32476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32477 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32478 -syntax, see section
32479 \begin_inset space ~
32483 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32485 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32497 \begin_layout Standard
32507 \begin_layout Standard
32517 \begin_layout Standard
32518 and for the answer branch
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32531 \begin_layout Standard
32541 \begin_layout Standard
32542 \begin_inset Branch Question
32546 \begin_layout Standard
32550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32583 \begin_layout Standard
32587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32616 Now it is possible to use the
32620 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32627 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32630 commands to obtain conditional output.
32631 Here is an example formula where only the
32638 \begin_inset Formula
32640 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32648 \begin_layout Standard
32649 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32657 \begin_layout Standard
32658 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32660 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32664 \begin_inset space \space{}
32667 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32669 For this advanced usage, see the
32675 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32680 \begin_layout Section
32682 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32684 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32689 \begin_inset Index idx
32692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32701 \begin_layout Standard
32704 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32705 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32708 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32710 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32716 \begin_inset Index idx
32719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32721 -packages ! hyperref
32726 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32727 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32728 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32729 part of the document.
32733 \begin_layout Standard
32734 The header information in the dialog tab
32738 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32739 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32740 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32741 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32745 \begin_inset space ~
32749 \begin_inset space ~
32754 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32755 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32756 and author entries.
32760 \begin_inset space ~
32764 \begin_inset space ~
32768 \begin_inset space ~
32773 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32776 \begin_layout Standard
32777 You can specify in the dialog tab
32781 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32786 \begin_inset space ~
32790 \begin_inset space ~
32794 \begin_inset space ~
32799 option allows long links to be split;
32802 \begin_inset space ~
32806 \begin_inset space ~
32810 \begin_inset space ~
32818 \begin_inset space ~
32823 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32826 \begin_inset space ~
32831 colors the different links.
32832 The default colors are:
32835 \begin_layout Labeling
32836 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32841 for hyperlinks and URLs
32844 \begin_layout Labeling
32845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32853 \begin_layout Labeling
32854 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32862 \begin_layout Standard
32863 but you can change these in the field
32868 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32871 \begin_layout Standard
32874 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32877 \begin_layout Standard
32882 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32883 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32884 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32887 \begin_layout Standard
32892 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32893 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32894 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32904 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32905 when opening the PDF.
32907 \begin_inset space ~
32910 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32911 \begin_inset space ~
32914 1 will only display the sections.
32917 \begin_layout Standard
32918 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32919 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32925 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32926 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32936 \begin_layout Section
32938 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32940 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32942 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32949 \begin_layout Subsection
32952 \begin_inset Index idx
32955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32963 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32965 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32972 \begin_layout Standard
32973 As \SpecialChar LyX
32974 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32975 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32976 commands and constructs,
32979 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32980 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32981 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32982 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32983 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32984 cannot support all packages and
32988 \begin_layout Standard
32989 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32990 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32991 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32995 Code box is created by the menu
32997 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32999 \begin_inset space ~
33004 or by the toolbar button
33017 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
33025 \begin_layout Standard
33026 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
33028 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
33030 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
33034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33035 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
33040 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33047 , you can write the command part
33053 in a \SpecialChar TeX
33054 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33058 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33059 Code box behind the word.
33060 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33061 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33065 \begin_layout Standard
33066 \begin_inset Graphics
33067 filename clipart/ERT.png
33075 \begin_layout Standard
33079 \begin_layout Standard
33080 This is a line with a
33084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33107 \begin_layout Standard
33108 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33116 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33117 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33118 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33119 know that the command is finished.
33127 \begin_layout Subsection
33128 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33130 \begin_inset Argument 1
33133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33134 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33141 \begin_inset Index idx
33144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33154 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33161 \begin_layout Standard
33162 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33163 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33164 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33165 uses in the background.
33166 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33167 is based on commands, you can
33168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33176 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33177 any time if you know the right commands.
33178 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33179 is the end of the day.
33180 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33181 all caption labels bold.
33182 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33184 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33188 \begin_layout Standard
33189 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33191 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33193 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33196 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33206 \begin_layout Standard
33207 As result you find that the package
33212 \begin_inset Index idx
33215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33217 -packages ! caption
33223 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33228 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33232 \begin_inset space ~
33240 \begin_layout Standard
33245 usepackage[options]{package name}
33248 \begin_layout Standard
33249 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33250 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33251 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33252 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33255 \begin_layout Standard
33256 In your case the package name is
33261 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33266 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33267 So you add the command
33270 \begin_layout Standard
33275 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33279 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33284 For more commands provided by the
33288 package, have a look at its documentation,
33289 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33304 \begin_layout Standard
33305 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33307 For example if you use a
33311 class, you don't need the package
33315 , you can instead write
33318 \begin_layout Standard
33323 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33328 \begin_layout Standard
33329 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33330 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33331 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33338 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33341 \begin_layout Standard
33342 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33343 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33345 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33346 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33347 Code box as described in the previous
33351 \begin_layout Standard
33352 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33353 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33356 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33358 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33366 \begin_layout Standard
33367 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33373 \begin_layout Standard
33377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33387 \begin_inset Note Note
33390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33391 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33399 \begin_layout Left Header
33400 \begin_inset Argument 1
33403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_inset Note Note
33426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33427 defines the header line as described below
33435 \begin_layout Center Header
33436 \begin_inset Argument 1
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33448 \begin_layout Right Header
33449 \begin_inset Argument 1
33452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33473 \begin_layout Left Footer
33474 \begin_inset Argument 1
33477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33498 \begin_layout Center Footer
33499 \begin_inset Argument 1
33502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33514 \begin_inset Newline newline
33518 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33524 \begin_layout Right Footer
33525 \begin_inset Argument 1
33528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33550 \begin_layout Section
33551 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33552 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33554 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33559 \begin_inset Index idx
33562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33563 Document ! Header/Footer line
33569 \begin_inset Index idx
33572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33581 \begin_layout Standard
33582 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33586 \begin_inset space ~
33597 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33609 As a second step add in the menu
33611 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33612 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33621 Custom Header/Footerlines
33624 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33628 This module offers the following 6
33629 \begin_inset space ~
33635 \begin_layout Description
33637 \begin_inset space ~
33641 \begin_inset space ~
33645 \begin_inset space ~
33649 \begin_inset space ~
33653 \begin_inset space ~
33659 \begin_layout Description
33661 \begin_inset space ~
33665 \begin_inset space ~
33669 \begin_inset space ~
33673 \begin_inset space ~
33677 \begin_inset space ~
33683 \begin_layout Standard
33684 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33685 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33688 \begin_layout Standard
33689 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33690 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33692 \begin_inset space ~
33696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33698 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33702 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33705 \begin_layout Standard
33706 \begin_inset Float figure
33712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33715 \begin_inset Tabular
33716 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33717 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33718 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33719 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33720 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33740 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33751 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33769 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33780 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33784 The normal text on the page goes here.
33785 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33787 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33788 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33793 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33813 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33831 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33842 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33860 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33878 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33883 name "fig:Page-layout"
33887 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33900 \begin_layout Standard
33901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33909 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33913 \begin_inset space ~
33918 is set to “Default”.
33919 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33928 \begin_layout Subsection
33932 \begin_layout Standard
33933 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33934 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33935 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33936 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33938 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33940 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33943 \begin_layout Standard
33944 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33945 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33949 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33951 \begin_inset space ~
33959 \begin_layout Description
33962 thepage prints the current page number
33965 \begin_layout Description
33968 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33971 \begin_layout Description
33974 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33977 \begin_layout Description
33980 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33981 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33988 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33991 because it usually goes in a left header.
33994 \begin_layout Description
33997 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33998 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
34000 It is normally used in the right header.
34003 \begin_layout Subsection
34004 Default header/footer
34007 \begin_layout Standard
34008 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
34009 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
34010 footer has the page number.
34011 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
34012 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
34013 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
34016 \begin_inset space ~
34024 \begin_layout Subsection
34028 \begin_layout Standard
34029 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
34030 Some pages are different.
34031 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
34032 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
34033 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
34034 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
34035 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
34038 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34039 Header and footer decoration line
34042 \begin_layout Standard
34043 By default, you get a 0.4
34044 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34047 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
34048 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34060 in the following way:
34063 \begin_layout Standard
34070 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34073 \begin_layout Standard
34074 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34087 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34088 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34094 \begin_layout Standard
34095 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34097 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34098 \begin_inset space ~
34102 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34112 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34113 Several header/footer lines
34116 \begin_layout Standard
34117 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34118 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34119 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34121 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34136 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34137 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34139 \begin_inset space ~
34147 \begin_layout Standard
34154 headheight}{height}
34157 \begin_layout Standard
34162 is a size in standard units (e.
34163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34167 \begin_inset space \space{}
34175 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34176 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34177 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34178 logfile with the menu
34180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34195 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34200 \begin_inset Index idx
34203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34205 -packages ! fancyhdr
34211 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34212 for your header/footer.
34215 \begin_layout Subsection
34219 \begin_layout Standard
34220 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34221 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34222 This example consists of the following definition:
34225 \begin_layout Description
34227 \begin_inset space ~
34236 , empty optional argument
34239 \begin_layout Description
34241 \begin_inset space ~
34244 Header empty, empty optional argument
34247 \begin_layout Description
34249 \begin_inset space ~
34258 in the optional argument
34261 \begin_layout Description
34263 \begin_inset space ~
34272 in the optional argument
34275 \begin_layout Description
34277 \begin_inset space ~
34290 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34294 \begin_inset Newline newline
34298 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34302 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34305 in the optional argument
34308 \begin_layout Description
34310 \begin_inset space ~
34319 , empty optional argument
34322 \begin_layout Description
34325 headrulewidth set to 2
34326 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34332 \begin_layout Standard
34333 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34334 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34340 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34350 \begin_layout Standard
34351 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34357 \begin_layout Standard
34361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34365 pagestyle{headings}
34371 \begin_inset Note Note
34374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34375 switches back to page style with the default headings
34383 \begin_layout Section
34384 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34385 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34387 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34392 \begin_inset Index idx
34395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34402 \begin_inset Index idx
34405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34414 \begin_layout Standard
34416 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34417 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34418 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34421 \begin_layout Subsection
34425 \begin_layout Standard
34426 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34432 \begin_inset Index idx
34435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34437 -packages ! preview-latex
34442 (on some systems named simply
34447 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34449 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34456 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34458 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34466 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34467 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34468 -package are automatically
34469 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34473 \begin_layout Subsection
34477 \begin_layout Standard
34478 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34479 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34481 activate the option
34484 \begin_inset space ~
34491 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34497 \begin_inset space ~
34501 \begin_inset space ~
34504 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34511 \begin_inset space ~
34524 \begin_inset space ~
34529 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34532 \begin_layout Standard
34533 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34538 \begin_inset space ~
34546 \begin_inset space ~
34554 \begin_layout Standard
34555 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34556 and when you finish
34560 \begin_layout Standard
34561 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34569 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34570 generated by activating the option
34573 \begin_inset space ~
34579 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34587 \begin_layout Subsection
34588 Selected document parts
34591 \begin_layout Standard
34592 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34593 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34594 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34595 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34597 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34599 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34603 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34604 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34605 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34608 \begin_layout Standard
34609 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34616 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34628 is explained in section
34630 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34635 \begin_inset space ~
34645 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34646 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34647 the final rotated boxes,
34648 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34649 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34651 Here is the result:
34654 \begin_layout Standard
34655 \begin_inset Preview
34657 \begin_layout Standard
34662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34666 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34672 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34682 height_special "totalheight"
34687 backgroundcolor "none"
34690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34715 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34721 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34743 \begin_layout Standard
34744 Previewing works also for colors.
34745 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34764 is explained in section
34771 \begin_inset space ~
34784 \begin_layout Standard
34785 \begin_inset Preview
34787 \begin_layout Standard
34791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34810 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34815 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34834 \begin_layout Standard
34835 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34841 \begin_layout Standard
34842 If \SpecialChar LyX
34843 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34844 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34845 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34846 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34847 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34848 the \SpecialChar TeX
34850 If \SpecialChar LyX
34851 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34852 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34854 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34855 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34856 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34859 \begin_layout Subsection
34864 \begin_layout Standard
34865 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34866 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34869 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34871 \begin_inset space ~
34876 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34878 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34880 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34881 's main window, then only this selection
34882 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34883 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34884 the source view window.
34889 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34890 ; but note that if you have
34891 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34893 not just the one which is open at the time.
34896 \begin_layout Section
34897 Advanced Find and Replace
34898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34900 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34905 \begin_inset Index idx
34908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34915 \begin_inset Index idx
34918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34927 \begin_layout Subsection
34931 \begin_layout Standard
34932 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34933 allows for searching of complex,
34934 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34936 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34937 The key-features are:
34940 \begin_layout Itemize
34941 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34942 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34943 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34947 \begin_layout Itemize
34948 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34949 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34950 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34951 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34954 \begin_layout Itemize
34955 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34956 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34957 outside of mathematics environments
34960 \begin_layout Itemize
34961 Search may be widened to a specific
34966 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34970 \begin_inset space ~
34973 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34974 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34981 \begin_layout Itemize
34982 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34983 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34984 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34988 \begin_inset space ~
34991 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34994 \begin_layout Subsection
34998 \begin_layout Standard
34999 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
35001 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
35014 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
35017 ) or the toolbar button
35020 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
35026 Advanced Find and Replace
35031 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35035 \begin_layout Standard
35041 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
35045 \begin_inset space ~
35050 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
35053 arg "paragraph-break"
35057 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
35058 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35062 arg "paragraph-break"
35065 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35069 searches backwards.
35072 \begin_layout Standard
35076 \begin_inset space ~
35081 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35090 \begin_inset space ~
35095 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35098 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35099 Searching for mathematics
35102 \begin_layout Standard
35103 Mathematical formulas, such as
35104 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35107 or something more complex like
35108 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35111 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35116 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35117 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35118 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35119 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35125 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35129 \begin_layout Standard
35130 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35131 This is done by switching to the
35135 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35140 This way, entering in the
35147 \begin_layout Itemize
35148 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35149 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35152 \begin_layout Itemize
35153 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35154 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35157 \begin_layout Itemize
35158 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35159 of it only within section headings.
35160 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35161 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35165 \begin_layout Itemize
35166 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35167 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35170 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35174 \begin_layout Standard
35175 The entries made in the
35179 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35182 \begin_inset space ~
35188 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35192 button or alternatively press
35195 arg "paragraph-break"
35202 while the cursor is in the
35205 \begin_inset space ~
35213 \begin_layout Standard
35214 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35216 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35220 \begin_layout Itemize
35221 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35222 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35230 with its typewriter version
35231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35245 \begin_layout Itemize
35246 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35252 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35264 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35271 (you may want to enable the
35274 \begin_inset space ~
35282 \begin_inset space ~
35287 options and disable the
35295 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35296 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35300 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35303 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35304 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35308 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35311 , or occurrences of
35312 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35316 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35322 \begin_layout Subsection
35326 \begin_layout Standard
35327 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35332 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35334 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35336 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35346 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35352 This is done with the context menu
35354 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35355 Insert Regular Expression
35357 while the cursor is in the
35362 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35363 expression matching rules
35367 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35368 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35375 \begin_inset space ~
35378 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35379 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35385 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35386 same text in the document.
35387 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35388 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35391 \begin_layout Enumerate
35392 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35397 editor the fraction
35398 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35402 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35405 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35406 fractions with the given denominator.
35409 \begin_layout Enumerate
35410 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35422 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35427 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35428 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35429 Also, by inserting a
35430 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35433 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35434 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35439 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35440 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35443 , and referring back to them through
35444 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35448 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35452 For example, try searching with the regexp
35453 \begin_inset Newline newline
35456 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35459 \begin_inset Newline newline
35462 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35465 \begin_layout Standard
35466 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35469 \begin_layout Standard
35470 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35478 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35479 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35480 sub-expressions is absolute.
35482 \begin_inset space ~
35486 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35489 always refers to the first occurrence of
35490 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35493 in all entered regexps.
35501 \begin_layout Section
35503 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35505 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35510 \begin_inset Index idx
35513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35522 \begin_layout Standard
35524 has a built-in spell checker.
35527 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35534 key or the toolbar button
35537 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35540 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35541 beginning of the currently selected text.
35542 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35543 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35544 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35545 scrolled so that it is visible.
35546 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35547 n, if any could be found.
35548 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35552 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35553 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35556 \begin_layout Standard
35557 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35560 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35564 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35565 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35567 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35568 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35571 \begin_inset space ~
35579 arg "dialog-show character"
35582 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35584 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35587 \begin_layout Standard
35588 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35589 can be downloaded from here:
35590 \begin_inset Newline newline
35594 \begin_inset Flex URL
35597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35599 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35605 \begin_inset Newline newline
35609 \begin_inset space ~
35612 files for each language.
35613 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35614 \begin_inset space ~
35617 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35618 's installation subfolder
35626 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35628 \begin_inset Newline newline
35631 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35632 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35633 but in most cases these are
35649 is the language code.
35652 \begin_layout Subsection
35656 \begin_layout Standard
35659 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35660 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35662 \begin_inset space ~
35665 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35668 you can set the following things:
35671 \begin_layout Description
35673 \begin_inset space ~
35676 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35677 should use for spell checking.
35678 Depending on your platform,
35692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35693 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35694 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35709 \begin_inset space ~
35712 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35715 \begin_layout Description
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35720 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35721 will always use the given language
35722 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35725 \begin_layout Description
35727 \begin_inset space ~
35730 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35732 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35736 \begin_inset space \space{}
35740 This should normally not be needed.
35743 \begin_layout Description
35745 \begin_inset space ~
35749 \begin_inset space ~
35752 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35754 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35758 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35764 \begin_layout Description
35766 \begin_inset space ~
35769 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35770 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35771 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35772 appear in a context menu.
35773 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35777 \begin_layout Description
35779 \begin_inset space ~
35783 \begin_inset space ~
35787 \begin_inset space ~
35790 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35794 \begin_layout Section
35796 \begin_inset Index idx
35799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35808 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35815 \begin_layout Standard
35817 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35818 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35828 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35830 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35840 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35842 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35843 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35844 which are available for many languages.
35847 \begin_layout Standard
35848 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35849 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35853 \begin_layout Subsection
35854 Setting up the thesaurus
35857 \begin_layout Standard
35866 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35870 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35875 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35877 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35881 \begin_inset space ~
35889 For instance, the US English files are named:
35892 \begin_layout Itemize
35896 \begin_layout Itemize
35900 \begin_layout Standard
35909 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35910 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35913 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35914 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35915 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35917 \begin_inset space ~
35922 ) to the path where they are installed.
35926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35927 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35928 ies, typical locations are
35934 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35938 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35942 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35945 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35951 LibreOffice-<Version>
35958 On the Mac, the default location is
35960 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35961 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35962 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35963 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35964 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35965 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35973 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35974 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35975 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35979 \begin_layout Standard
35980 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35981 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35985 \begin_layout Itemize
35986 \begin_inset Flex URL
35989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35999 \begin_layout Standard
36000 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
36001 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
36003 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36004 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36005 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36007 \begin_inset space ~
36012 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
36014 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
36015 and point \SpecialChar LyX
36019 \begin_layout Standard
36020 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
36022 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
36025 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
36031 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
36034 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
36035 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
36037 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36043 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36044 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36045 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
36047 \begin_inset space ~
36052 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
36055 \begin_layout Subsection
36056 Using the thesaurus
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
36062 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36065 or the toolbar button
36068 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36071 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36073 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36075 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36076 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36077 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36086 ), related terms (such as
36089 \begin_inset space ~
36098 ), compounds (such as
36101 \begin_inset space ~
36110 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36119 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36122 \begin_layout Standard
36123 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36124 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36128 \begin_layout Standard
36129 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36130 the dictionary, such as the above
36134 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36135 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36139 \begin_inset space \space{}
36142 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36143 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36144 For example, looking up the word form
36148 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36153 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36158 \begin_inset space \space{}
36169 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36170 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36171 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36174 \begin_layout Section
36176 \begin_inset Index idx
36179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36186 \begin_inset Index idx
36189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36190 Document ! Change Tracking
36196 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36198 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36205 \begin_layout Standard
36206 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36207 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36208 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36209 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36211 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36213 \begin_inset space ~
36216 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36218 \begin_inset space ~
36226 \begin_layout Standard
36227 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36241 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36242 You can change the color in
36244 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36245 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36247 \begin_inset space ~
36251 \begin_inset space ~
36256 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36262 \begin_inset Index idx
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36266 Color ! Change tracking
36271 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36272 's status bar when the
36273 cursor is in changed text.
36274 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36277 arg "changes-merge"
36283 \begin_layout Standard
36284 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36286 \begin_inset Index idx
36289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36298 \begin_layout Standard
36299 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36305 \begin_layout Standard
36306 \begin_inset Graphics
36307 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36315 \begin_layout Standard
36316 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36322 \begin_layout Standard
36323 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36326 \begin_layout Standard
36327 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36333 \begin_layout Standard
36334 \begin_inset Tabular
36335 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36336 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36337 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36338 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36339 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36340 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36343 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36348 arg "changes-track"
36356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36362 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36364 \begin_inset space ~
36367 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36369 \begin_inset space ~
36378 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36387 arg "changes-output"
36395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36401 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36403 \begin_inset space ~
36406 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36408 \begin_inset space ~
36412 \begin_inset space ~
36416 \begin_inset space ~
36425 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36442 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36446 Jumps to the next change
36452 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36461 arg "change-accept"
36469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36475 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36477 \begin_inset space ~
36480 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36482 \begin_inset space ~
36491 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36500 arg "change-reject"
36508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36514 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36516 \begin_inset space ~
36519 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36521 \begin_inset space ~
36530 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36539 arg "changes-merge"
36547 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36555 \begin_inset space ~
36558 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36560 \begin_inset space ~
36569 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36578 arg "all-changes-accept"
36586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36592 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36594 \begin_inset space ~
36597 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36603 \begin_inset space ~
36612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36621 arg "all-changes-reject"
36629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36637 \begin_inset space ~
36640 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36642 \begin_inset space ~
36646 \begin_inset space ~
36655 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36678 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36679 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36681 \begin_inset space ~
36690 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36691 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36713 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36715 \begin_inset space ~
36731 \begin_layout Standard
36732 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36738 \begin_layout Standard
36739 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36760 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36761 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36762 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36763 the next change after the current cursor position.
36764 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36765 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36766 step to the next change.
36767 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36770 \begin_layout Standard
36771 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36772 to describe a change.
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36782 \begin_inset Index idx
36785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36787 -packages ! dvipost
36793 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36795 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36802 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36806 \begin_layout Section
36807 Comparison of Documents
36808 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36810 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36815 \begin_inset Index idx
36818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36819 Comparison of documents
36827 \begin_layout Standard
36828 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36831 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36835 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36836 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36838 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36840 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36844 \begin_inset space ~
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36861 \begin_inset space ~
36865 \begin_inset space ~
36869 \begin_inset space ~
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36877 \begin_inset space ~
36881 \begin_inset space ~
36886 enables the change tracking option
36889 \begin_inset space ~
36893 \begin_inset space ~
36897 \begin_inset space ~
36902 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36905 \begin_layout Section
36906 International Support
36907 \begin_inset Index idx
36910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36911 International support
36919 \begin_layout Standard
36920 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36921 with any language you want.
36922 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36923 up \SpecialChar LyX
36925 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36927 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36935 \begin_layout Standard
36936 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36937 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36938 \begin_inset space ~
36942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36944 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36951 \begin_layout Subsection
36953 \begin_inset Index idx
36956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36963 \begin_inset Index idx
36966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36967 Document ! Settings
36973 \begin_inset Index idx
36976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36977 Document ! Language
36985 \begin_layout Standard
36988 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36989 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36992 dialog lets you set
36994 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36999 \begin_layout Standard
37004 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
37009 \begin_inset space ~
37014 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
37015 For details about the different encoding options see section
37016 \begin_inset space ~
37020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37022 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
37029 \begin_layout Subsection
37030 Keyboard mapping configuration
37031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37033 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
37040 \begin_layout Standard
37041 If you have for example a U.
37042 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37045 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
37046 can use an alternate keymap.
37047 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
37052 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37053 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
37054 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
37057 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
37058 \begin_inset space ~
37062 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37064 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37069 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37070 which one you want to use.
37073 \begin_layout Standard
37074 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37075 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37076 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37077 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37080 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37081 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37082 one to support the characters you want.
37083 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37090 \begin_layout Chapter
37093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37095 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37102 \begin_layout Standard
37103 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37104 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37105 topic inside the user's guide.
37108 \begin_layout Section
37110 \begin_inset Index idx
37113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37122 \begin_layout Standard
37127 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37130 \begin_layout Subsection
37134 \begin_layout Standard
37135 Creates a new document.
37138 \begin_layout Subsection
37142 \begin_layout Standard
37143 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37144 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37145 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37156 \begin_layout Subsection
37160 \begin_layout Standard
37161 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37162 Click there on a file to open it.
37165 \begin_layout Subsection
37169 \begin_layout Standard
37170 Closes the current document.
37173 \begin_layout Subsection
37177 \begin_layout Standard
37178 Closes all opened documents.
37181 \begin_layout Subsection
37185 \begin_layout Standard
37186 Saves the actual document.
37189 \begin_layout Subsection
37193 \begin_layout Standard
37194 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37197 \begin_layout Subsection
37201 \begin_layout Standard
37202 Saves all opened documents.
37205 \begin_layout Subsection
37209 \begin_layout Standard
37210 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37213 \begin_layout Subsection
37217 \begin_layout Standard
37218 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37219 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37220 It is described in the section
37222 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37227 Additional Features
37232 \begin_layout Subsection
37236 \begin_layout Standard
37237 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37238 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37240 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37241 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37245 \begin_layout Standard
37246 When using the menu entry
37249 \begin_inset space ~
37254 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37258 \begin_inset space ~
37262 \begin_inset space ~
37266 \begin_inset space ~
37271 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37272 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37275 \begin_layout Subsection
37277 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37279 name "subsec:Export"
37286 \begin_layout Standard
37287 You can export your document to various file formats.
37288 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37290 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37291 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37292 during its configuration.
37295 \begin_layout Standard
37296 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37298 \begin_inset space ~
37302 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37304 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37311 \begin_layout Description
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37320 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37322 \begin_inset space ~
37325 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37326 \begin_inset Newline newline
37329 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37330 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37334 \begin_layout Description
37335 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37341 \begin_layout Description
37343 \begin_inset space ~
37346 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37352 \begin_layout Description
37353 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37354 's native DVI-format.
37355 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37356 files paths or file names in your document.
37358 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37365 \begin_layout Description
37366 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37367 in files paths or file names
37370 \begin_layout Description
37372 \begin_inset space ~
37379 ) DVI-format using the program
37381 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37384 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37388 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37396 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37404 \begin_layout Description
37406 \begin_inset space ~
37409 (cropped) the same as
37413 but with cropped page margins.
37416 \begin_layout Description
37418 \begin_inset space ~
37421 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37425 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37430 \begin_layout Description
37434 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37442 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37450 \begin_layout Description
37452 \begin_inset space ~
37456 \begin_inset space ~
37459 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37463 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37471 \begin_layout Description
37475 \begin_inset space ~
37484 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37485 source that is compilable with the program
37487 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37491 \begin_layout Description
37495 \begin_inset space ~
37500 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37501 source, additionally all images used in the document
37502 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37506 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37509 \begin_layout Description
37513 \begin_inset space ~
37518 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37519 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37520 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37528 \begin_layout Description
37532 \begin_inset space ~
37541 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37542 source that is compilable with the program
37548 \begin_layout Description
37550 \begin_inset space ~
37554 \begin_inset space ~
37561 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37562 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37568 \begin_layout Description
37570 \begin_inset space ~
37573 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37574 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37576 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37580 \begin_inset space \space{}
37585 \begin_inset space ~
37589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37604 represent the version number)
37607 \begin_layout Description
37609 \begin_inset space ~
37613 \begin_inset space ~
37616 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37617 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37618 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37622 \begin_layout Description
37623 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37624 's internal XHTML engine
37627 \begin_layout Description
37629 \begin_inset space ~
37633 \begin_inset space ~
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37641 \begin_inset space ~
37644 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37649 For the conversion the program
37658 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37661 \begin_layout Description
37662 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37667 \begin_layout Description
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37672 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37674 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37677 For the conversion the program
37686 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37689 \begin_layout Description
37691 \begin_inset space ~
37694 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37695 For the conversion the program
37704 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37707 \begin_layout Description
37709 \begin_inset space ~
37712 (cropped) the same as
37715 \begin_inset space ~
37720 but with cropped page margins
37723 \begin_layout Description
37727 \begin_inset space ~
37732 PDF-format using the program
37736 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37739 \begin_layout Description
37743 \begin_inset space ~
37747 \begin_inset space ~
37755 \begin_inset space ~
37760 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37761 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37765 \begin_inset space \space{}
37768 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37772 \begin_layout Description
37776 \begin_inset space ~
37781 PDF-format using the program
37783 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37786 , produces PDF-files directly
37789 \begin_layout Description
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37798 PDF-format using the program
37802 , produces PDF-files directly
37805 \begin_layout Description
37809 \begin_inset space ~
37814 PDF-format using the program
37818 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37821 \begin_layout Description
37825 \begin_inset space ~
37830 PDF-format using the program
37835 , produces PDF-files directly
37838 \begin_layout Description
37842 \begin_inset space ~
37850 \begin_layout Description
37854 \begin_inset space ~
37858 \begin_inset space ~
37863 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37864 and then exported as text using the program
37869 \begin_layout Description
37874 PostScript format using the program
37882 options see section
37883 \begin_inset space ~
37887 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37889 reference "subsec:General-output"
37896 \begin_layout Description
37897 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37898 source and also code in the statistical programming
37912 it is possible to use
37916 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37920 \begin_layout Standard
37921 If one of the menu entries
37928 \begin_inset space ~
37937 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37939 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37941 \begin_inset space ~
37945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37947 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37952 \begin_inset Index idx
37955 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37956 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37965 \begin_layout Subsection
37969 \begin_layout Standard
37970 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37971 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37974 \begin_inset space ~
37978 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37980 reference "sec:Paths"
37985 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37994 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37995 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37996 's preferences as described in section
37997 \begin_inset space ~
38001 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38003 reference "subsec:Converters"
38010 \begin_layout Subsection
38011 New and Close Window
38014 \begin_layout Standard
38015 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
38019 \begin_layout Subsection
38023 \begin_layout Standard
38024 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
38027 \begin_layout Section
38029 \begin_inset Index idx
38032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38041 \begin_layout Subsection
38045 \begin_layout Standard
38046 Described in section
38047 \begin_inset space ~
38051 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38053 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
38060 \begin_layout Subsection
38061 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
38064 \begin_layout Standard
38065 Described in section
38066 \begin_inset space ~
38070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38072 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38079 \begin_layout Subsection
38083 \begin_layout Standard
38084 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38085 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38088 \begin_layout Subsection
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38093 Selects the whole document.
38096 \begin_layout Subsection
38097 Find & Replace (Quick)
38100 \begin_layout Standard
38101 Described in section
38102 \begin_inset space ~
38106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38108 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38115 \begin_layout Subsection
38116 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38119 \begin_layout Standard
38120 Described in section
38121 \begin_inset space ~
38125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38127 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38134 \begin_layout Subsection
38135 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38138 \begin_layout Standard
38139 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38143 \begin_layout Subsection
38147 \begin_layout Standard
38148 Described in section
38149 \begin_inset space ~
38153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38155 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38162 \begin_layout Subsection
38164 \begin_inset Index idx
38167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38168 Paragraph ! Settings
38176 \begin_layout Standard
38177 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38178 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38184 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38190 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38191 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38193 \begin_inset space ~
38201 \begin_layout Subsection
38202 Table and Rows & Columns
38205 \begin_layout Standard
38206 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38207 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38208 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38211 \begin_layout Subsection
38215 \begin_layout Standard
38216 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38217 It will dissolve this inset.
38218 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38222 \begin_layout Subsection
38226 \begin_layout Standard
38227 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38228 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38231 \begin_layout Subsection
38232 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38235 \begin_layout Standard
38236 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38238 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38243 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38245 reference "sec:Nesting"
38250 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38252 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38259 \begin_layout Subsection
38262 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38265 \begin_layout Standard
38266 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38267 nts of the same type.
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38275 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38279 for an explanation.
38282 \begin_layout Section
38284 \begin_inset Index idx
38287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38296 \begin_layout Standard
38297 At the bottom of the
38301 menu the opened documents are listed.
38304 \begin_layout Subsection
38305 Open/Close all Insets
38308 \begin_layout Standard
38309 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38312 \begin_layout Subsection
38313 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38316 \begin_layout Standard
38317 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38320 \begin_layout Standard
38321 Math macros are described in the
38328 \begin_layout Subsection
38332 \begin_layout Standard
38333 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38334 \begin_inset space ~
38338 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38340 reference "sec:Navigating"
38345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38347 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38354 \begin_layout Subsection
38358 \begin_layout Standard
38359 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38365 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38367 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38374 \begin_layout Subsection
38378 \begin_layout Standard
38379 Opens a window showing console messages.
38380 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38382 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38385 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38386 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38387 is processing the document.
38390 \begin_layout Subsection
38392 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38394 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38399 \begin_inset Index idx
38402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38411 \begin_layout Standard
38412 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38413 All toolbars and the
38416 \begin_inset space ~
38421 can be turned on and off.
38426 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38438 \begin_inset space ~
38450 \begin_inset space ~
38455 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38459 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38466 \begin_layout Standard
38471 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38475 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38476 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38477 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38478 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38479 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38482 \begin_layout Standard
38484 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38485 \begin_inset space ~
38489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38491 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38498 \begin_layout Subsection
38502 \begin_layout Standard
38506 \begin_inset space ~
38510 \begin_inset space ~
38514 \begin_inset space ~
38518 \begin_inset space ~
38522 \begin_inset space ~
38526 \begin_inset space ~
38531 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38532 's main window vertically while
38535 \begin_inset space ~
38539 \begin_inset space ~
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38551 \begin_inset space ~
38555 \begin_inset space ~
38560 will split it horizontally.
38561 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38562 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38563 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38564 three or more documents at the same time.
38565 To close a split view, use the menu
38568 \begin_inset space ~
38572 \begin_inset space ~
38580 \begin_layout Subsection
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38585 Closes a split view.
38588 \begin_layout Subsection
38592 \begin_layout Standard
38593 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38594 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38595 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38596 's main window fullscreen.
38597 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38598 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38601 \begin_layout Section
38603 \begin_inset Index idx
38606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38615 \begin_layout Subsection
38619 \begin_layout Standard
38620 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38621 \begin_inset space ~
38625 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38627 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38638 \begin_layout Subsection
38640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38642 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38649 \begin_layout Standard
38650 Here you can insert the following characters:
38653 \begin_layout Description
38658 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38661 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38662 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38663 -packages you have installed.
38664 You can get a complete display by checking
38667 \begin_inset space ~
38673 \begin_inset Newline newline
38677 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38685 Not all characters will be visible in the
38689 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38690 dialog (see section
38691 \begin_inset space ~
38695 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38697 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38701 ) can display every character.
38709 \begin_layout Description
38710 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38714 \begin_layout Description
38716 \begin_inset space ~
38720 \begin_inset space ~
38723 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38724 \begin_inset space ~
38728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38730 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38737 \begin_layout Description
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38745 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38746 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38752 \begin_layout Description
38754 \begin_inset space ~
38757 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38767 \begin_layout Description
38769 \begin_inset space ~
38772 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38776 \begin_layout Description
38778 \begin_inset space ~
38781 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38785 \begin_layout Description
38787 \begin_inset space ~
38790 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38796 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38802 \begin_layout Description
38804 \begin_inset space ~
38807 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38811 \begin_layout Description
38813 \begin_inset space ~
38817 \begin_inset Index idx
38820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38827 \begin_inset Index idx
38830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38831 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38836 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38837 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38839 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38845 \begin_inset Index idx
38848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38856 \begin_inset Newline newline
38859 More information about this feature can be found in the
38865 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38871 \begin_layout Description
38872 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38874 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38875 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38879 \begin_layout Subsection
38883 \begin_layout Standard
38884 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38887 \begin_layout Description
38888 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38889 \begin_inset script superscript
38891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38900 \begin_layout Description
38901 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38902 \begin_inset script subscript
38904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38913 \begin_layout Description
38915 \begin_inset space ~
38918 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38925 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38932 \begin_layout Description
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38937 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38938 \begin_inset space ~
38942 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38944 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38951 \begin_layout Description
38953 \begin_inset space ~
38956 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38957 \begin_inset space ~
38961 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38963 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38970 \begin_layout Description
38972 \begin_inset space ~
38975 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38981 \begin_inset space \space{}
38984 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38985 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38994 To insert a fraction use the command
38999 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
39003 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
39009 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39012 The visible space is hereby the character before the
39019 \begin_layout Description
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39024 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
39025 \begin_inset space ~
39029 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39031 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
39038 \begin_layout Description
39040 \begin_inset space ~
39043 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
39044 \begin_inset space ~
39048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39050 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
39057 \begin_layout Description
39059 \begin_inset space ~
39062 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
39063 \begin_inset space ~
39067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39069 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39076 \begin_layout Description
39077 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39078 \begin_inset space ~
39082 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39084 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39091 \begin_layout Description
39093 \begin_inset space ~
39096 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39097 \begin_inset space ~
39101 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39103 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39110 \begin_layout Description
39112 \begin_inset space ~
39115 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39116 \begin_inset space ~
39120 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39122 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39129 \begin_layout Description
39131 \begin_inset space ~
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39138 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39139 \begin_inset space ~
39143 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39145 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39152 \begin_layout Description
39154 \begin_inset space ~
39157 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39158 as described in section
39159 \begin_inset space ~
39163 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39165 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39172 \begin_layout Description
39174 \begin_inset space ~
39177 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39178 \begin_inset space ~
39182 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39184 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39191 \begin_layout Description
39193 \begin_inset space ~
39196 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39197 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39199 \begin_inset space ~
39203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39205 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39212 \begin_layout Description
39214 \begin_inset space ~
39217 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39218 \begin_inset space ~
39222 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39224 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39231 \begin_layout Description
39233 \begin_inset space ~
39237 \begin_inset space ~
39240 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39241 \begin_inset space ~
39245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39247 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39254 \begin_layout Subsection
39258 \begin_layout Standard
39259 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39263 \begin_inset space ~
39284 are described in section
39285 \begin_inset space ~
39289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39291 reference "sec:toc"
39300 is described in section
39301 \begin_inset space ~
39305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39307 reference "sec:Index"
39315 is described in section
39316 \begin_inset space ~
39320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39322 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39328 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39331 is described in section
39332 \begin_inset space ~
39336 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39338 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39345 \begin_layout Subsection
39349 \begin_layout Standard
39350 To insert floats, as described in section
39351 \begin_inset space ~
39355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39357 reference "sec:Floats"
39361 and in detail the chapter
39368 \begin_inset space ~
39376 \begin_layout Subsection
39380 \begin_layout Standard
39381 To insert notes, described in section
39382 \begin_inset space ~
39386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39388 reference "sec:Notes"
39395 \begin_layout Subsection
39399 \begin_layout Standard
39400 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39402 Branches are described in section
39403 \begin_inset space ~
39407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39409 reference "sec:Branches"
39416 \begin_layout Subsection
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39421 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39422 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39424 An example is the document class
39425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39432 with three custom insets.
39435 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39439 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39445 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39448 \begin_layout Subsection
39450 \begin_inset Index idx
39453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39462 \begin_layout Standard
39463 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39465 For more information see chapter
39467 External Document Parts
39470 \begin_inset space ~
39476 \begin_layout Subsection
39478 \begin_inset Index idx
39481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39490 \begin_layout Standard
39491 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39492 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39499 \begin_inset space ~
39507 \begin_layout Subsection
39511 \begin_layout Standard
39516 dialog as described in section
39517 \begin_inset space ~
39521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39523 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39530 \begin_layout Subsection
39534 \begin_layout Standard
39539 as described in section
39540 \begin_inset space ~
39544 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39546 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39553 \begin_layout Subsection
39557 \begin_layout Standard
39562 as described in section
39563 \begin_inset space ~
39567 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39569 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39576 \begin_layout Subsection
39578 \begin_inset Index idx
39581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39588 \begin_inset Index idx
39591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39592 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39600 \begin_layout Standard
39601 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39602 Floats are described in section
39603 \begin_inset space ~
39607 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39609 reference "sec:Floats"
39613 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39615 Multi-page Captions
39620 \begin_inset space ~
39628 \begin_layout Subsection
39632 \begin_layout Standard
39633 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39634 \begin_inset space ~
39638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39640 reference "sec:Index"
39647 \begin_layout Subsection
39651 \begin_layout Standard
39652 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39653 \begin_inset space ~
39657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39659 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39666 \begin_layout Subsection
39670 \begin_layout Standard
39671 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39672 Tables are described in section
39673 \begin_inset space ~
39677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39679 reference "sec:Tables"
39683 and in detail in the chapter
39690 \begin_inset space ~
39698 \begin_layout Subsection
39702 \begin_layout Standard
39708 Graphics are described in section
39709 \begin_inset space ~
39713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39715 reference "sec:Graphics"
39722 \begin_layout Subsection
39726 \begin_layout Standard
39727 Inserts a URL as described in section
39728 \begin_inset space ~
39732 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39734 reference "subsec:URLs"
39741 \begin_layout Subsection
39745 \begin_layout Standard
39746 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39747 \begin_inset space ~
39751 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39753 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39760 \begin_layout Subsection
39764 \begin_layout Standard
39765 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39766 \begin_inset space ~
39770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39772 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39779 \begin_layout Subsection
39783 \begin_layout Standard
39784 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39785 \begin_inset space ~
39789 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39791 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39798 \begin_layout Subsection
39802 \begin_layout Standard
39803 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39804 title or caption of a float.
39805 Inserts a short title as described in section
39806 \begin_inset space ~
39810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39812 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39819 \begin_layout Subsection
39824 \begin_layout Standard
39825 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39826 Code box as described in section
39827 \begin_inset space ~
39831 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39833 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39840 \begin_layout Subsection
39842 \begin_inset Index idx
39845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39854 \begin_layout Standard
39855 Inserts a program listings box.
39856 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39858 Program Code Listings
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39871 \begin_layout Subsection
39875 \begin_layout Standard
39876 Inserts the actual date.
39877 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39881 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39889 \begin_inset space ~
39897 \begin_layout Subsection
39901 \begin_layout Standard
39902 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39903 \begin_inset space ~
39907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39909 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39916 \begin_layout Section
39918 \begin_inset Index idx
39921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39930 \begin_layout Standard
39931 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39932 \begin_inset space ~
39935 of the current document.
39936 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39939 \begin_layout Subsection
39943 \begin_layout Standard
39944 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39945 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39946 to jump, for example, between section
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39951 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39952 \begin_inset space ~
39955 2.5 and use the submenu
39958 \begin_inset space ~
39962 \begin_inset space ~
39969 \begin_inset space ~
39975 \begin_inset space ~
39979 \begin_inset space ~
39985 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39989 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39995 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39998 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
40001 \begin_layout Standard
40002 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
40006 \begin_inset space ~
40011 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
40014 \begin_inset space ~
40019 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
40022 \begin_layout Subsection
40023 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
40026 \begin_layout Standard
40027 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
40031 \begin_layout Subsection
40035 \begin_layout Standard
40036 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
40037 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
40038 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
40042 \begin_inset space ~
40046 \begin_inset space ~
40054 \begin_layout Subsection
40058 \begin_layout Standard
40059 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
40062 The \SpecialChar LyX
40063 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40065 \begin_inset space ~
40073 \begin_inset space ~
40078 manual for a detailed description.
40081 \begin_layout Section
40083 \begin_inset Index idx
40086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40095 \begin_layout Subsection
40099 \begin_layout Standard
40100 Change Tracking is described in section
40101 \begin_inset space ~
40105 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40107 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40114 \begin_layout Subsection
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40124 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40125 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40127 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40128 to the clipboard or update the view.
40129 \begin_inset Newline newline
40132 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40136 \begin_layout Standard
40139 Open Containing Directory
40141 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40142 's temporary folder for the document.
40143 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40144 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40145 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40146 For example some journals require to send the
40150 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40154 \begin_layout Subsection
40155 Start Appendix Here
40158 \begin_layout Standard
40159 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40160 as described in section
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40167 reference "sec:Appendices"
40174 \begin_layout Subsection
40176 \begin_inset space ~
40182 \begin_layout Standard
40183 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40184 default output format for the document (menu
40186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40188 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40190 \begin_inset space ~
40194 \begin_inset space ~
40200 \begin_inset space ~
40204 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40206 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40210 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40213 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40214 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40219 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40221 \begin_inset space ~
40224 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40226 \begin_inset space ~
40230 \begin_inset space ~
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40242 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40246 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40247 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40249 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40250 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40252 \begin_inset space ~
40255 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40260 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40264 \begin_inset space ~
40268 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40270 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40275 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40276 when it is first configured.
40277 The default output format is
40280 \begin_inset space ~
40288 \begin_layout Subsection
40289 View (Other Formats)
40292 \begin_layout Standard
40293 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40294 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40295 actual document with an external program.
40296 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40297 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40298 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40300 All possible formats are listed in section
40301 \begin_inset space ~
40305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40307 reference "subsec:Export"
40312 You should at least see the menu entry
40317 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40319 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40321 \begin_inset space ~
40325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40327 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40332 \begin_inset Index idx
40335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40336 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40345 \begin_layout Standard
40346 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40347 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40349 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40350 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40352 \begin_inset space ~
40355 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40360 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40364 \begin_inset space ~
40368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40370 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40375 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40376 when it is first configured.
40379 \begin_layout Subsection
40381 \begin_inset space ~
40387 \begin_layout Standard
40388 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40389 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40392 \begin_layout Subsection
40393 Update (Other Formats)
40396 \begin_layout Standard
40397 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40398 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40401 \begin_layout Subsection
40402 View Master Document
40405 \begin_layout Standard
40406 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40408 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40412 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40427 manual for more information on this topic).
40428 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40429 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40433 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40442 generates the output of the whole book, while
40446 will just output the chapter alone.
40449 \begin_layout Standard
40450 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40451 in the document settings (menu
40453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40454 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40455 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40457 \begin_inset space ~
40461 \begin_inset space ~
40467 \begin_inset space ~
40471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40473 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40477 ) or in the preferences (menu
40479 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40480 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40482 \begin_inset space ~
40485 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40487 \begin_inset space ~
40490 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset space ~
40502 \begin_inset space ~
40506 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40508 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40515 \begin_layout Subsection
40516 Update Master Document
40519 \begin_layout Standard
40520 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40536 \begin_inset space ~
40541 manual for more information on this topic).
40542 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40543 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40546 \begin_layout Standard
40547 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40548 in the document settings (menu
40550 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40551 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40552 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40558 \begin_inset space ~
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40570 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40574 ) or in the preferences (menu
40576 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40577 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40579 \begin_inset space ~
40582 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40584 \begin_inset space ~
40587 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40589 \begin_inset space ~
40593 \begin_inset space ~
40599 \begin_inset space ~
40603 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40605 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40612 \begin_layout Subsection
40614 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40616 name "subsec:Compressed"
40623 \begin_layout Standard
40624 Un/compresses the current document.
40625 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40626 compression (see the
40628 Additional Features
40630 manual for details).
40633 \begin_layout Subsection
40637 \begin_layout Standard
40638 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40641 \begin_layout Subsection
40645 \begin_layout Standard
40646 The document settings are described in appendix
40647 \begin_inset space ~
40651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40653 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40660 \begin_layout Section
40662 \begin_inset Index idx
40665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40674 \begin_layout Subsection
40678 \begin_layout Standard
40679 Spell checking is explained in section
40680 \begin_inset space ~
40684 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40686 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40693 \begin_layout Subsection
40697 \begin_layout Standard
40698 The thesaurus is described in section
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40703 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40705 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40712 \begin_layout Subsection
40714 \begin_inset Index idx
40717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40724 \begin_inset Index idx
40727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40736 \begin_layout Standard
40737 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40738 the highlighted document part.
40741 \begin_layout Subsection
40747 \begin_inset Index idx
40750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40751 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40760 \begin_layout Standard
40761 Generates with the help of the program
40763 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40766 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40767 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40768 This feature is not available on Windows.
40771 \begin_layout Subsection
40777 \begin_inset Index idx
40780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40790 \begin_layout Standard
40791 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40796 \begin_inset space ~
40801 to see the full filename paths.
40804 \begin_layout Subsection
40806 \begin_inset Index idx
40809 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40818 \begin_layout Standard
40819 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40820 files as described in section
40821 \begin_inset space ~
40825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40827 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40834 \begin_layout Subsection
40836 \begin_inset Index idx
40839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40852 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40870 \begin_inset Index idx
40873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40883 \begin_layout Standard
40884 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40885 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40886 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40887 -packages and programs it needs; see
40889 \begin_inset space ~
40893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40895 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40902 \begin_layout Subsection
40906 \begin_layout Standard
40911 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40912 \begin_inset space ~
40916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40918 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40925 \begin_layout Section
40927 \begin_inset Index idx
40930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40939 \begin_layout Standard
40940 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40941 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40943 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40947 \begin_layout Standard
40951 \begin_inset space ~
40956 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40957 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40958 packages and classes found
40959 by \SpecialChar LyX
40961 \begin_inset space ~
40965 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40967 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40974 \begin_layout Standard
40978 \begin_inset space ~
40983 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40988 \begin_layout Section
40990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40992 name "sec:Toolbars"
40999 \begin_layout Standard
41000 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41007 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
41014 \begin_layout Standard
41015 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
41016 This is described in the
41018 Additional Features
41023 \begin_layout Subsection
41025 \begin_inset Index idx
41028 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41037 \begin_layout Standard
41038 \begin_inset Graphics
41039 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
41047 \begin_layout Standard
41048 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41054 \begin_layout Standard
41055 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 \begin_inset Note Note
41075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41076 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41081 manual for more information.
41089 \begin_layout Standard
41090 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41096 \begin_layout Standard
41097 \begin_inset Tabular
41098 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41099 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41100 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41101 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41107 \begin_inset Graphics
41108 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41118 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41121 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41122 pull-down box for the environments
41135 \begin_layout Standard
41136 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41142 \begin_layout Standard
41144 \begin_inset Tabular
41145 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41146 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41147 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41148 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41149 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41150 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41172 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41179 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41180 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41202 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41209 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41232 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41239 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41248 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41262 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41278 arg "spelling-continuously"
41286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 Spellcheck continuously
41296 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41313 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41326 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41327 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41343 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41346 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41349 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41356 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41357 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41379 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41386 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41387 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41409 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41416 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41417 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41433 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41439 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41446 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41455 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41469 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41479 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41488 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41489 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41495 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41509 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41515 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41537 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41551 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41552 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41559 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41580 Emphasize text, function of the
41582 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41584 \begin_inset space ~
41587 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41596 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41597 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41617 Set text to noun style, function of the
41619 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41621 \begin_inset space ~
41624 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41633 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41642 arg "textstyle-apply"
41650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41654 Format text using the current settings in the
41656 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41658 \begin_inset space ~
41661 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41693 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41694 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41696 \begin_inset space ~
41705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41714 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41728 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41735 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41736 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41742 arg "tabular-insert"
41750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41756 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41772 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41784 Toggle outline window on/off,
41786 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41793 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41814 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41820 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41829 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41841 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41854 \begin_layout Subsection
41856 \begin_inset Index idx
41859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41868 \begin_layout Standard
41869 \begin_inset Graphics
41870 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41878 \begin_layout Standard
41879 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41885 \begin_layout Standard
41886 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41890 \begin_layout Standard
41891 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41897 \begin_layout Standard
41898 \begin_inset Tabular
41899 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41900 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41901 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41902 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41930 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41939 arg "layout Enumerate"
41947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41957 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41966 arg "layout Itemize"
41974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41984 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42020 arg "layout Description"
42028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42038 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42047 arg "depth-increment"
42055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42061 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42063 \begin_inset space ~
42067 \begin_inset space ~
42076 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42085 arg "depth-decrement"
42093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42099 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42101 \begin_inset space ~
42105 \begin_inset space ~
42114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42123 arg "float-insert figure"
42131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42138 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42145 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42154 arg "float-insert table"
42162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42169 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42176 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42199 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42206 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42215 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42223 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42229 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42245 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42259 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42266 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42283 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42289 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42291 \begin_inset space ~
42300 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42309 arg "nomencl-insert"
42317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42323 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42343 arg "footnote-insert"
42351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42357 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42387 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42422 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42424 \begin_inset space ~
42433 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42442 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42450 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42456 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42518 \begin_inset space ~
42527 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42528 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42536 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42550 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42551 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42558 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42567 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42582 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42584 \begin_inset space ~
42593 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42594 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42602 arg "dialog-show character"
42610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42616 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42618 \begin_inset space ~
42621 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42628 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42637 arg "layout-paragraph"
42645 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42651 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42653 \begin_inset space ~
42662 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42671 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42679 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42682 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42685 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42699 \begin_layout Subsection
42700 View/Update Toolbar
42701 \begin_inset Index idx
42704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 Toolbar ! View / Update
42713 \begin_layout Standard
42714 \begin_inset Graphics
42715 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42722 \begin_layout Standard
42723 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42729 \begin_layout Standard
42730 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42734 \begin_layout Standard
42735 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42741 \begin_layout Standard
42742 \begin_inset Tabular
42743 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42744 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42745 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42746 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42747 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42748 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42777 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42778 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42786 arg "buffer-update"
42794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42807 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42816 arg "master-buffer-view"
42824 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42830 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42832 \begin_inset space ~
42841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42850 arg "master-buffer-update"
42858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42864 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42866 \begin_inset space ~
42870 \begin_inset space ~
42879 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42880 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42883 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42888 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42902 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42903 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42904 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42905 Synchronize with Output
42911 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42912 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42915 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42934 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42935 View (Other Formats)
42941 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42948 arg "update-others"
42956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42962 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42963 Update (Other Formats)
42976 \begin_layout Standard
42977 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42981 \begin_layout Subsection
42985 \begin_layout Standard
42986 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42987 \begin_inset space ~
42991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42993 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42997 , the table toolbar
42998 \begin_inset Index idx
43001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43015 manual and the math macro toolbar
43016 \begin_inset Index idx
43019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43032 \begin_layout Chapter
43033 The Document Settings
43034 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43036 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
43041 \begin_inset Index idx
43044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43045 Document ! Settings
43053 \begin_layout Standard
43057 \begin_inset space ~
43062 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
43063 is called with the menu
43065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43069 You can save your document settings as default with the
43071 Save as Document Defaults
43073 button in any dialog.
43074 This will create a template named
43078 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43079 when you create a new document without
43083 \begin_layout Standard
43088 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43089 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43092 \begin_layout Standard
43093 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43094 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43095 to find the one you are looking for.
43096 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43097 the submenus of the dialog.
43099 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43103 \begin_inset space \space{}
43107 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43111 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43114 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43115 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43116 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43119 \begin_layout Section
43123 \begin_layout Standard
43124 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43126 Document classes are described in section
43127 \begin_inset space ~
43131 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43133 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43141 \begin_layout Standard
43145 \begin_inset space ~
43150 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43155 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43156 as a layout for a document class.
43157 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43159 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43168 \begin_layout Standard
43169 Some classes use special class options by default.
43170 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43174 and you can decide to use them or not.
43175 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43176 recommended you leave them untouched.
43181 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43182 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43187 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43189 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43195 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43196 \begin_inset Newline newline
43201 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43204 \begin_inset Newline newline
43207 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43208 distribution, see section
43213 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43215 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43228 \begin_layout Standard
43233 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43234 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43235 in the background if the child document
43236 is opened without its master.
43237 This way child documents are always compilable.
43238 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43245 \begin_inset space ~
43253 \begin_layout Standard
43254 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43265 \begin_inset Index idx
43268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43270 -packages ! prettyref
43276 \begin_inset Index idx
43279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43281 -packages ! refstyle
43286 for cross-references, see section
43287 \begin_inset space ~
43291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43293 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43300 \begin_layout Section
43304 \begin_layout Standard
43305 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43306 Please refer to the section
43309 \begin_inset space ~
43317 \begin_inset space ~
43322 manual for details.
43325 \begin_layout Section
43329 \begin_layout Standard
43330 Modules are explained in section
43331 \begin_inset space ~
43335 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43337 reference "subsec:Modules"
43344 \begin_layout Section
43348 \begin_layout Standard
43350 \begin_inset space ~
43354 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43356 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43363 \begin_layout Section
43367 \begin_layout Standard
43368 The document font settings are described in section
43369 \begin_inset space ~
43373 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43375 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43382 \begin_layout Section
43386 \begin_layout Standard
43387 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43399 \begin_inset space ~
43404 and whether it should be a
43407 \begin_inset space ~
43412 can also be specified here.
43415 \begin_layout Standard
43416 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43417 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43418 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43420 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43423 \begin_layout Standard
43426 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43429 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43430 justifies the text on screen.
43431 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43435 \begin_layout Section
43439 \begin_layout Standard
43440 This dialog is described in sections
43441 \begin_inset space ~
43445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43447 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43454 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43461 \begin_layout Section
43465 \begin_layout Standard
43466 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43473 reference "subsec:Margins"
43480 \begin_layout Section
43482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43484 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43489 \begin_inset Index idx
43492 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43493 Language ! Encoding
43501 \begin_layout Standard
43502 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43503 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43504 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43506 is always encoded in utf8).
43507 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43508 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43509 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43510 -command is not known for
43511 a particular character).
43514 \begin_layout Standard
43515 If you use the option
43520 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43521 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43522 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43524 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43525 exactly one encoding.
43526 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43529 \begin_layout Standard
43531 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43532 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43533 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43534 installation supports Unicode), choose
43535 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43536 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43537 is quite incomplete, so
43538 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43543 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43544 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43545 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43546 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43547 -commands is not used, because all
43548 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43549 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43550 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43551 , two new alternative engines
43552 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43554 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43556 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43559 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43581 \begin_inset space ~
43585 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43587 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43592 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43596 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43599 \begin_layout Standard
43603 \begin_inset space ~
43608 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43609 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43619 The possible settings are:
43622 \begin_layout Description
43623 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43625 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43626 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43630 \begin_inset space ~
43634 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43636 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43643 \begin_layout Description
43644 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43645 format you will use.
43646 In many cases this will be
43651 \begin_inset Index idx
43654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 If the newer package
43667 \begin_inset Index idx
43670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43672 -packages ! polyglossia
43677 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43678 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43679 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43681 this package will be used instead of
43688 \begin_layout Description
43690 \begin_inset space ~
43701 would be more appropriate.
43704 \begin_layout Description
43705 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43706 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43710 (for German texts), type in
43713 \begin_inset Newline newline
43718 usepackage{ngerman}
43721 \begin_layout Description
43722 None will not use a language package.
43723 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43726 \begin_layout Standard
43727 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43730 \begin_layout Description
43732 \begin_inset space ~
43736 \begin_inset space ~
43740 \begin_inset space ~
43747 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43753 \begin_inset Index idx
43756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43758 -packages ! inputenc
43764 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43765 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43766 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43770 \begin_layout Description
43771 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43773 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43774 commands, which may result in a big
43775 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43776 -commands are needed.
43779 \begin_layout Description
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43785 \begin_inset space ~
43788 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43791 \begin_layout Description
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43800 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43803 \begin_layout Description
43805 \begin_inset space ~
43808 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43811 \begin_layout Description
43813 \begin_inset space ~
43817 \begin_inset space ~
43820 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43821 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43824 \begin_layout Description
43826 \begin_inset space ~
43830 \begin_inset space ~
43833 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43837 \begin_layout Description
43839 \begin_inset space ~
43843 \begin_inset space ~
43846 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43847 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43850 \begin_layout Description
43852 \begin_inset space ~
43856 \begin_inset space ~
43860 \begin_inset space ~
43863 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43864 \begin_inset space ~
43870 \begin_layout Description
43872 \begin_inset space ~
43876 \begin_inset space ~
43880 \begin_inset space ~
43883 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43884 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43887 \begin_layout Description
43889 \begin_inset space ~
43893 \begin_inset space ~
43896 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43897 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43898 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43899 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43900 \begin_inset space ~
43904 \begin_inset space ~
43910 \begin_layout Description
43912 \begin_inset space ~
43916 \begin_inset space ~
43919 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43920 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43921 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43923 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43924 \begin_inset space ~
43928 \begin_inset space ~
43934 \begin_layout Description
43936 \begin_inset space ~
43940 \begin_inset space ~
43943 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43946 \begin_layout Description
43948 \begin_inset space ~
43952 \begin_inset space ~
43955 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43958 \begin_layout Description
43960 \begin_inset space ~
43964 \begin_inset space ~
43967 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43970 \begin_layout Description
43972 \begin_inset space ~
43975 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43978 \begin_layout Description
43980 \begin_inset space ~
43983 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43986 \begin_layout Description
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43992 \begin_inset space ~
43995 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43998 \begin_layout Description
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44010 \begin_layout Description
44012 \begin_inset space ~
44016 \begin_inset space ~
44019 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
44022 \begin_layout Description
44024 \begin_inset space ~
44028 \begin_inset space ~
44034 \begin_layout Description
44036 \begin_inset space ~
44040 \begin_inset space ~
44043 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44049 \begin_inset Index idx
44052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44059 , when using this, set the document language to
44064 \begin_layout Description
44066 \begin_inset space ~
44070 \begin_inset space ~
44073 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44078 , when using this, set the document language to
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44087 \begin_layout Description
44089 \begin_inset space ~
44093 \begin_inset space ~
44096 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44102 \begin_inset Index idx
44105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44107 -packages ! japanese
44112 , when using this, set the document language to
44117 \begin_layout Description
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44126 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44131 , when using this, set the document language to
44136 \begin_layout Description
44138 \begin_inset space ~
44142 \begin_inset space ~
44145 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44150 , when using this, set the document language to
44155 \begin_layout Description
44157 \begin_inset space ~
44160 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44163 \begin_layout Description
44165 \begin_inset space ~
44169 \begin_inset space ~
44173 \begin_inset space ~
44176 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44179 \begin_layout Description
44181 \begin_inset space ~
44185 \begin_inset space ~
44189 \begin_inset space ~
44192 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44193 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44194 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44197 \begin_layout Description
44199 \begin_inset space ~
44203 \begin_inset space ~
44209 \begin_layout Description
44211 \begin_inset space ~
44215 \begin_inset space ~
44218 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44219 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44222 \begin_layout Description
44224 \begin_inset space ~
44228 \begin_inset space ~
44231 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44237 \begin_inset Index idx
44240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44247 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44250 \begin_layout Description
44252 \begin_inset space ~
44260 \begin_inset space ~
44263 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44270 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44273 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44280 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44281 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44283 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44286 \begin_layout Description
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44292 \begin_inset space ~
44295 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44301 \begin_inset Index idx
44304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44311 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44314 \begin_layout Description
44316 \begin_inset space ~
44319 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44325 \begin_inset Index idx
44328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44330 -packages ! inputenc
44336 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44340 \begin_layout Description
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44353 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44354 \begin_inset space ~
44360 \begin_layout Description
44362 \begin_inset space ~
44366 \begin_inset space ~
44370 \begin_inset space ~
44373 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44374 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44375 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44379 \begin_layout Description
44381 \begin_inset space ~
44385 \begin_inset space ~
44389 \begin_inset space ~
44392 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44393 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44396 \begin_layout Section
44398 \begin_inset Index idx
44401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44408 \begin_inset Index idx
44411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44418 \begin_inset Index idx
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44422 Color ! Shaded boxes
44428 \begin_inset Index idx
44431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44432 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44441 Here you can alter the font color for the
44445 (default: black), for
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44453 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44457 (default: white) and for
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44470 sets the color back to the default.
44473 \begin_layout Standard
44474 Clicking any button showing
44482 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44483 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44484 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44485 later more quickly.
44488 \begin_layout Standard
44489 Note, if you change the
44492 \begin_inset space ~
44497 font color and use the option
44500 \begin_inset space ~
44505 in the document settings under
44508 \begin_inset space ~
44513 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44514 \begin_inset space ~
44518 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44520 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44527 \begin_layout Standard
44528 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44534 \begin_layout Standard
44538 \begin_inset space ~
44547 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44550 \begin_inset space ~
44553 Code after a forced page break:
44556 \begin_layout Itemize
44557 For the page color:
44558 \begin_inset Newline newline
44565 pagecolor{color name}
44568 \begin_layout Itemize
44569 For the text color:
44570 \begin_inset Newline newline
44580 \begin_layout Standard
44581 You are restricted to one of
44617 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44624 \begin_inset space ~
44630 \begin_inset Newline newline
44633 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44634 names to refer to them:
44637 \begin_layout Itemize
44643 \begin_inset Newline newline
44648 page_backgroundcolor
44651 \begin_layout Itemize
44655 \begin_inset space ~
44661 \begin_inset Newline newline
44669 \begin_layout Itemize
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44679 \begin_inset Newline newline
44687 \begin_layout Itemize
44691 \begin_inset space ~
44697 \begin_inset Newline newline
44705 \begin_layout Standard
44706 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44717 \begin_inset space ~
44725 \begin_layout Section
44729 \begin_layout Standard
44730 Here you can adjust the
44734 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44738 as described in section
44739 \begin_inset space ~
44743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44745 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44752 \begin_layout Section
44756 \begin_layout Standard
44757 Here you can specify if a
44758 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44761 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44763 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44769 \begin_inset Index idx
44772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44774 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44776 -packages ! biblatex
44788 \begin_inset Index idx
44791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44803 \begin_inset Index idx
44806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44808 -packages ! jurabib
44815 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44816 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44818 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44823 Sectioned bibliography
44825 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44831 \begin_inset Index idx
44834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44836 -packages ! bibtopic
44842 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44844 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44849 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44851 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44855 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44862 for the generation of the bibliography.
44863 For a further description
44864 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44868 \begin_inset space ~
44872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44874 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44881 \begin_layout Section
44885 \begin_layout Standard
44886 Here you can define the
44890 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44892 \begin_inset space ~
44896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44898 reference "sec:Index"
44905 \begin_layout Section
44909 \begin_layout Standard
44910 The PDF properties are explained in section
44911 \begin_inset space ~
44915 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44917 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44924 \begin_layout Section
44928 \begin_layout Standard
44929 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44930 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44936 \begin_inset Index idx
44939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44941 -packages ! amsmath
44951 \begin_inset Index idx
44954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44956 -packages ! amssymb
44966 \begin_inset Index idx
44969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44981 \begin_inset Index idx
44984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44996 \begin_inset Index idx
44999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45001 -packages ! mathdots
45011 \begin_inset Index idx
45014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45016 -packages ! mathtools
45026 \begin_inset Index idx
45029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45041 \begin_inset Index idx
45044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45046 -packages ! stackrel
45056 \begin_inset Index idx
45059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45061 -packages ! stmaryrd
45071 \begin_inset Index idx
45074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45076 -packages ! undertilde
45081 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45084 \begin_layout Description
45085 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45086 -errors in formulas,
45087 ensure that you have this enabled.
45090 \begin_layout Description
45091 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45092 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45093 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45097 \begin_layout Description
45098 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45101 \begin_inset space ~
45113 \begin_layout Description
45114 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45117 \begin_inset space ~
45129 \begin_layout Description
45130 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45141 \begin_layout Description
45142 mathtools is used for the math commands
45178 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45185 \begin_layout Description
45186 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45188 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45197 \begin_layout Description
45198 stackrel is used for the math command
45215 \begin_layout Description
45216 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45219 \begin_layout Description
45220 undertilde is used for the math command
45228 Accents for one Character
45237 \begin_layout Section
45241 \begin_layout Standard
45242 The float placement options are described in the section
45245 \begin_inset space ~
45253 \begin_inset space ~
45261 \begin_layout Section
45265 \begin_layout Standard
45266 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45268 Program Code Listings
45273 \begin_inset space ~
45281 \begin_layout Section
45285 \begin_layout Standard
45286 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45294 set to be used and set the
45299 The itemize environment is described in section
45300 \begin_inset space ~
45304 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45306 reference "sec:Itemize"
45313 \begin_layout Standard
45314 You can furthermore specify a
45317 \begin_inset space ~
45322 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45323 command of the desired character.
45324 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45331 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45333 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45337 \begin_inset space \space{}
45341 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45351 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45352 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45355 \begin_layout Standard
45356 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45364 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45365 -packages in the preamble (menu
45368 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45369 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45372 \begin_inset space ~
45378 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45382 usepackage{textcomp}
45385 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45389 usepackage{amssymb}
45399 \begin_layout Section
45403 \begin_layout Standard
45404 Branches are described in section
45405 \begin_inset space ~
45409 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45411 reference "sec:Branches"
45418 \begin_layout Section
45420 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45422 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45429 \begin_layout Standard
45430 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45433 \begin_layout Description
45435 \begin_inset space ~
45439 \begin_inset space ~
45442 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45447 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45451 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45455 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45462 View Master Document
45463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45467 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45470 Update Master Document
45471 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45478 menu or the toolbar.
45479 The default is set in
45481 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45482 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45484 \begin_inset space ~
45487 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45491 \begin_inset space ~
45495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45497 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45504 \begin_layout Description
45506 \begin_inset space ~
45510 \begin_inset space ~
45513 Output settings for the menu
45515 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45517 \begin_inset space ~
45523 For a detailed description see section
45525 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45530 \begin_inset space ~
45538 \begin_layout Description
45540 \begin_inset space ~
45544 \begin_inset space ~
45547 Options offers settings for the export format
45555 \begin_inset space ~
45560 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45561 \begin_inset space ~
45564 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45568 \begin_inset space ~
45573 settings are described in detail in section
45575 Math Output in XHTML
45580 \begin_inset space ~
45589 \begin_inset space ~
45593 \begin_inset space ~
45598 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45601 \begin_layout Description
45603 \begin_inset space ~
45608 Save transient properties
45610 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45611 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45612 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45616 \begin_layout Itemize
45617 the activation of change tracking
45620 \begin_layout Itemize
45621 the output of tracked changes
45624 \begin_layout Itemize
45625 the recording of the document directory path.
45628 \begin_layout Standard
45629 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45630 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45634 \begin_layout Section
45642 \begin_layout Standard
45643 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45645 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45647 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45649 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45653 \begin_layout Standard
45654 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45655 -syntax is given in section
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45662 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45669 \begin_layout Chapter
45675 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45677 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45682 \begin_inset Index idx
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45694 \begin_layout Standard
45695 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45697 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45701 It has the following submenus.
45704 \begin_layout Section
45708 \begin_layout Subsection
45712 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45713 User Interface File
45714 \begin_inset Index idx
45717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 Customization ! of toolbars
45724 \begin_inset Index idx
45727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45728 Customization ! of menus
45736 \begin_layout Standard
45737 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45738 interface (ui) file.
45739 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45747 \begin_layout Description
45752 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45755 \begin_layout Description
45762 the menu entries in popup context menus
45765 \begin_layout Description
45770 specifies the toolbar buttons
45773 \begin_layout Standard
45774 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45775 and edit the entries.
45778 \begin_layout Standard
45779 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45791 entries must be finished with an explicit
45816 and in the case of the
45817 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45821 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45829 The syntax for the entries is:
45832 \begin_layout Standard
45833 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45839 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45847 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45851 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45856 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45862 \begin_layout Standard
45864 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45867 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45868 -functions are listed in the menu
45870 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45872 \begin_inset space ~
45880 \begin_layout Standard
45881 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45887 \begin_layout Standard
45888 For example, assuming you use the menu
45890 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45893 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45897 \begin_layout Standard
45898 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45912 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45916 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45922 \begin_layout Standard
45924 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45928 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45939 to have the sixth bookmark.
45942 \begin_layout Standard
45946 \begin_inset space ~
45951 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45952 's toolbar buttons.
45953 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45954 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45957 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45965 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45969 \begin_layout Standard
45972 Enable tool tips in main work area
45974 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45982 \begin_layout Standard
45987 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45988 should display in the menu
45990 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45992 \begin_inset space ~
46000 \begin_layout Subsection
46004 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46008 \begin_layout Standard
46011 Restore window layouts and geometries
46014 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
46015 the last \SpecialChar LyX
46019 \begin_layout Standard
46022 Restore cursor positions
46024 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
46028 \begin_layout Standard
46031 Load opened files from last session
46033 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
46037 \begin_layout Standard
46040 Clear all session information
46042 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
46043 sessions (cursor positions, names
46044 of last opened documents, etc.).
46047 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46049 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46051 name "subsec:Backup documents"
46056 \begin_inset Index idx
46059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46068 \begin_layout Standard
46071 Backup original documents when saving
46073 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46074 it was saved the last time.
46075 It is stored in the
46078 \begin_inset space ~
46084 \begin_inset space ~
46088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46090 reference "sec:Paths"
46094 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46103 The backup file has the file extension
46104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46118 \begin_layout Standard
46121 Backup documents, every
46123 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46126 \begin_layout Standard
46129 Save documents compressed by default
46131 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46132 \begin_inset space ~
46136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46138 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46143 This applies to newly created documents only.
46144 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46148 Windows & work area
46151 \begin_layout Standard
46154 Open documents in tabs
46156 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46160 \begin_layout Standard
46165 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46172 \begin_inset space ~
46176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46178 reference "sec:Paths"
46182 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46189 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46190 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46191 of \SpecialChar LyX
46193 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46194 instance is created for each file.
46197 \begin_layout Standard
46200 Single close-tab button
46202 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46212 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46213 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46215 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46216 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46222 \begin_layout Standard
46223 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46231 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46232 before the change takes effect.
46240 \begin_layout Standard
46245 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46247 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46249 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46253 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46254 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46255 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46258 \begin_layout Subsection
46260 \begin_inset Index idx
46263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46272 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46279 \begin_layout Standard
46280 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46284 \begin_layout Standard
46285 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 This section only deals with the fonts
46297 the \SpecialChar LyX
46299 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46314 \begin_layout Standard
46315 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46332 (depends on the system) as its
46335 \begin_inset space ~
46351 \begin_layout Standard
46352 You can change the font size with the
46359 \begin_layout Standard
46364 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46366 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46369 points have the size of 1
46370 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46374 \begin_inset space ~
46378 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46380 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46385 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46390 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46391 \begin_inset space ~
46395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46397 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46404 \begin_layout Standard
46407 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46409 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46410 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46411 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46412 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46413 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46415 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46416 \begin_inset space ~
46422 \begin_layout Subsection
46424 \begin_inset Index idx
46427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46428 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46435 \begin_inset Index idx
46438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46447 \begin_layout Standard
46448 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46449 by choosing an item in the
46450 list and selecting the
46457 \begin_layout Standard
46458 By checking the option
46462 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46465 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46466 \begin_inset space ~
46470 \begin_inset space ~
46475 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46478 \begin_layout Subsection
46480 \begin_inset Index idx
46483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46492 \begin_layout Standard
46493 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46497 \begin_layout Standard
46502 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46503 This feature is described in section
46504 \begin_inset space ~
46508 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46510 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46517 \begin_layout Standard
46518 Checking the option
46521 \begin_inset space ~
46525 \begin_inset space ~
46529 \begin_inset space ~
46534 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46537 \begin_layout Section
46539 \begin_inset Index idx
46542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46551 \begin_layout Subsection
46555 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46559 \begin_layout Standard
46562 Cursor follows scrollbar
46564 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46568 \begin_layout Standard
46569 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46570 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46571 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46574 \begin_layout Standard
46577 Scroll below end of document
46579 is self-explanatory.
46582 \begin_layout Standard
46583 In \SpecialChar LyX
46584 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46591 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46593 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46594 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46597 \begin_layout Standard
46600 Sort environments alphabetically
46602 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46605 \begin_layout Standard
46608 Group environments by their category
46610 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46613 \begin_layout Standard
46618 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46629 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46633 \begin_layout Standard
46634 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46639 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46640 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46644 \begin_layout Subsection
46646 \begin_inset Index idx
46649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46656 \begin_inset Index idx
46659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46660 Settings ! Shortcuts
46668 \begin_layout Standard
46673 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46675 Several binding files are available, among them:
46678 \begin_layout Description
46679 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46682 \begin_layout Description
46683 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46695 \begin_layout Description
46696 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46699 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46707 \begin_layout Standard
46708 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46713 , and binding files for special languages.
46714 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46715 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46719 \begin_inset space \space{}
46723 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46727 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46731 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46732 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46733 will try to use the appropriate binding
46737 \begin_layout Standard
46738 Some binding files, like
46742 , only have a limited scope.
46743 When looking at the end of the file
46747 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46750 \begin_layout Standard
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46758 \begin_inset space ~
46763 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46764 in the selected key binding file.
46767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46771 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46776 \begin_inset Index idx
46779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46780 Key Bindings ! Editing
46788 \begin_layout Standard
46789 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46790 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46791 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46792 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46795 Show key-bindings containing
46798 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46799 Insert there for example as keyword
46800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46807 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46808 functions that contain
46809 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46817 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46818 All \SpecialChar LyX
46819 functions are also listed in the file
46824 that you will find in the
46831 \begin_layout Standard
46832 For example, to add the shortcut
46840 , select the function and press the
46845 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46846 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46849 \begin_layout Standard
46850 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46851 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46853 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46854 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46856 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46861 \begin_layout Standard
46862 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46865 \begin_layout Standard
46866 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46868 The syntax of the entries is:
46871 \begin_layout Standard
46877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46881 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46885 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46896 \begin_layout Subsection
46898 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46900 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46905 \begin_inset Index idx
46908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46915 \begin_inset Index idx
46918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46919 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46927 \begin_layout Standard
46928 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46929 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46930 provides keyboard maps.
46931 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46932 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46935 \begin_inset space ~
46939 \begin_inset space ~
46944 and select the keyboard map file named
46951 \begin_layout Standard
46960 keyboard map and, if you use the
46964 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46967 arg "keymap-primary"
46973 arg "keymap-secondary"
46976 respectively or toggle between them with
46979 arg "keymap-toggle"
46985 \begin_layout Standard
46986 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46994 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
47003 \begin_layout Standard
47004 You can also specify the mouse
47006 Wheel scrolling speed
47009 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
47013 Middle mouse button pasting
47015 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
47016 inserts the content of the clipboard.
47019 \begin_layout Standard
47027 \begin_inset space ~
47031 \begin_inset space ~
47036 you can select a key for zooming.
47037 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
47040 \begin_layout Subsection
47044 \begin_layout Standard
47045 Input completion is described in section
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47050 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47052 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
47059 \begin_layout Section
47061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47068 \begin_inset Index idx
47071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47078 \begin_inset Index idx
47081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47090 \begin_layout Standard
47091 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47092 are normally determined during
47094 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47097 \begin_layout Description
47099 \begin_inset space ~
47102 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47103 's working directory.
47104 It is the default when you
47115 \begin_inset space ~
47123 \begin_layout Description
47125 \begin_inset space ~
47128 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47130 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47132 \begin_inset space ~
47136 \begin_inset space ~
47144 \begin_layout Description
47146 \begin_inset space ~
47149 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47155 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47159 \begin_inset Newline newline
47163 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47175 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47176 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47184 \begin_layout Description
47186 \begin_inset space ~
47190 \begin_inset Index idx
47193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47199 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47200 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47201 \begin_inset space ~
47205 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47207 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47215 will be used to save the backups.
47216 \begin_inset Newline newline
47219 Backup files have the ending
47220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47230 \begin_layout Description
47232 \begin_inset space ~
47235 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47236 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47238 \begin_inset Newline newline
47245 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47251 You can edit this file with the program
47260 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47261 in its preferences under
47264 \begin_inset space ~
47270 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47275 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47277 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47278 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47284 and \SpecialChar LyX
47285 need to be running the same time.
47286 \begin_inset Newline newline
47289 The pipe is also used for the
47293 feature, see section
47294 \begin_inset space ~
47298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47300 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47305 \begin_inset Newline newline
47308 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47309 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47310 \begin_inset Newline newline
47326 \begin_layout Description
47328 \begin_inset space ~
47331 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47334 \begin_layout Description
47336 \begin_inset space ~
47339 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47340 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47341 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47344 \begin_layout Description
47346 \begin_inset space ~
47349 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47355 You only need to specify it if you are using
47359 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47361 For \SpecialChar LyX
47366 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47370 \begin_layout Description
47372 \begin_inset space ~
47375 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47376 When \SpecialChar LyX
47377 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47378 to find it on the system.
47379 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47381 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47383 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47387 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47390 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47391 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47394 \begin_layout Description
47396 \begin_inset space ~
47399 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47400 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47401 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47402 code or in the document
47404 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47406 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47407 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47408 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47409 scanned for the input files.
47410 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47411 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47413 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47414 compilation may fail for some documents.
47417 \begin_layout Section
47421 \begin_layout Standard
47422 Here you can insert your
47431 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47433 \begin_inset space ~
47437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47439 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47443 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47446 \begin_layout Section
47448 \begin_inset Index idx
47451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47452 Language ! Settings
47458 \begin_inset Index idx
47461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47462 Settings ! Language
47470 \begin_layout Subsection
47472 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47474 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47481 \begin_layout Description
47483 \begin_inset space ~
47487 \begin_inset space ~
47490 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47492 You can find its actual translation status here:
47493 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47495 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47503 \begin_layout Description
47505 \begin_inset space ~
47508 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47509 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47510 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47511 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47528 The most widespread language package is
47533 \begin_inset Index idx
47536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47543 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47545 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47546 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47547 come with the alternative
47553 \begin_inset Index idx
47556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47558 -packages ! polyglossia
47563 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47564 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47570 The available selections are described in section
47571 \begin_inset space ~
47575 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47577 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47584 \begin_layout Description
47586 \begin_inset space ~
47589 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47590 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47591 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47592 An example is the start command
47598 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47600 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47604 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47620 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47625 \begin_layout Description
47627 \begin_inset space ~
47635 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47636 command toggles the package on and off.
47639 \begin_layout Description
47641 \begin_inset space ~
47645 \begin_inset space ~
47648 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47652 \begin_layout Description
47654 \begin_inset space ~
47658 \begin_inset space ~
47661 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47665 \begin_layout Description
47667 \begin_inset space ~
47671 \begin_inset space ~
47674 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47675 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47676 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47678 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47685 \begin_layout Description
47687 \begin_inset space ~
47690 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47692 When this option is not set, the
47695 \begin_inset space ~
47700 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47702 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47705 \begin_inset space ~
47713 \begin_layout Description
47715 \begin_inset space ~
47721 \begin_inset space ~
47727 When it is not set, the
47730 \begin_inset space ~
47735 is set to the end of the document.
47738 \begin_layout Description
47740 \begin_inset space ~
47744 \begin_inset space ~
47747 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47748 language will be underlined in blue.
47751 \begin_layout Description
47753 \begin_inset space ~
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47761 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47764 \begin_layout Description
47766 \begin_inset space ~
47769 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47770 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47771 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47772 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47775 \begin_layout Subsection
47779 \begin_layout Standard
47780 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47781 \begin_inset space ~
47785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47787 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47794 \begin_layout Section
47798 \begin_layout Subsection
47800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47802 name "subsec:General-output"
47809 \begin_layout Description
47811 \begin_inset space ~
47814 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47816 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47824 For a detailed description see section
47826 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47831 \begin_inset space ~
47839 \begin_layout Description
47841 \begin_inset space ~
47844 Options Options for the program
47848 that is used for the export format
47853 \begin_inset space ~
47857 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47859 reference "subsec:Export"
47864 Possible options are listed in the
47869 \begin_inset Newline newline
47873 \begin_inset Flex URL
47876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47878 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47888 \begin_layout Description
47890 \begin_inset space ~
47894 \begin_inset space ~
47897 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47900 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47901 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47903 \begin_inset space ~
47909 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47912 \begin_layout Description
47914 \begin_inset space ~
47918 \begin_inset Index idx
47921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47928 \begin_inset Index idx
47931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47932 Settings ! Date format
47937 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47938 \begin_inset Newline newline
47942 \begin_inset Flex URL
47945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47947 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47953 \begin_inset Newline newline
47956 For example the format
47957 \begin_inset Newline newline
47961 \begin_inset Newline newline
47964 prints the date as day/month/year.
47967 \begin_layout Description
47969 \begin_inset space ~
47973 \begin_inset space ~
47976 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47977 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47980 \begin_layout Subsection
47986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47988 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47993 \begin_inset Index idx
47996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47997 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
48006 \begin_layout Description
48008 \begin_inset space ~
48016 \begin_inset space ~
48020 \begin_inset space ~
48023 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
48028 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
48049 are used for Cyrillic.
48050 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
48051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48063 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
48065 sets up in the background.
48066 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48069 \begin_layout Description
48071 \begin_inset space ~
48075 \begin_inset space ~
48079 \begin_inset space ~
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48086 options They only have an effect when the program
48090 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48093 \begin_layout Standard
48094 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48095 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48096 manuals of the applications.
48099 \begin_layout Description
48101 \begin_inset space ~
48104 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48105 \begin_inset space ~
48109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48111 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48118 \begin_layout Description
48120 \begin_inset space ~
48123 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48124 \begin_inset space ~
48128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48130 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48137 \begin_layout Description
48139 \begin_inset space ~
48142 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48143 \begin_inset space ~
48147 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48149 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48156 \begin_layout Description
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48165 command Command for the program
48167 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48170 that is described in the section
48172 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48177 Additional Features
48182 \begin_layout Standard
48183 There are additionally the following options:
48186 \begin_layout Description
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48192 \begin_inset space ~
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48205 \begin_inset space ~
48208 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48219 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48223 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48226 to separate folders.
48227 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48229 \begin_inset Index idx
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48239 \begin_inset Index idx
48242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48251 \begin_layout Description
48253 \begin_inset space ~
48257 \begin_inset space ~
48261 \begin_inset space ~
48265 \begin_inset space ~
48269 \begin_inset space ~
48273 \begin_inset space ~
48276 changes Removes all manually set
48282 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48283 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48285 \begin_inset space ~
48290 dialog when changing the document class.
48293 \begin_layout Section
48295 \begin_inset space ~
48299 \begin_inset Index idx
48302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48311 \begin_layout Subsection
48313 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48315 name "subsec:Converters"
48320 \begin_inset Index idx
48323 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48332 \begin_layout Standard
48333 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48334 from one format to another.
48335 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48336 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48343 \begin_inset space ~
48348 field and press the
48353 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48357 \begin_inset space ~
48362 drop-down list, modify the
48366 field and press the
48373 \begin_layout Standard
48376 Converter File Cache
48382 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48384 Maximum Age (in days
48387 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48388 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48391 \begin_layout Standard
48392 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48393 definition, is described in the section
48404 \begin_layout Subsection
48406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48408 name "sec:File-Formats"
48413 \begin_inset Index idx
48416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48423 \begin_inset Index idx
48426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48435 \begin_layout Standard
48436 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48446 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48449 \begin_layout Standard
48450 You can also define the
48452 Default output format
48454 that is used when you use
48456 View, Update, View Master Document
48460 Update Master Document
48466 menu or the toolbar.
48469 \begin_layout Standard
48470 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48481 \begin_layout Standard
48482 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48484 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48485 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48486 This is done by specifying a
48491 More about this is described in the section
48502 \begin_layout Chapter
48503 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48505 \begin_inset Index idx
48508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48515 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48517 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48524 \begin_layout Standard
48526 \begin_inset space ~
48530 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48532 reference "tab:Units"
48536 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48537 and used in this documentation.
48540 \begin_layout Standard
48541 \begin_inset Float table
48547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48548 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48550 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48566 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48574 \begin_inset Tabular
48575 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48576 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48577 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48578 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48579 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48649 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48669 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48707 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48712 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48716 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48724 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48749 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48785 scaled point (65536
48786 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48790 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48798 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48801 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48823 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48846 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48860 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48864 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48868 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48901 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48937 % of original image width
48942 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48953 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48971 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48974 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49024 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49033 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49036 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49046 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49055 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49108 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49111 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49117 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49126 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49139 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49194 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49231 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49253 \begin_layout Chapter
49255 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49257 name "chap:Credits"
49264 \begin_layout Standard
49265 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49266 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49269 \begin_layout Itemize
49272 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49275 \begin_layout Itemize
49281 \begin_layout Itemize
49287 \begin_layout Itemize
49293 \begin_layout Itemize
49299 \begin_layout Itemize
49305 \begin_layout Itemize
49311 \begin_layout Itemize
49317 \begin_layout Itemize
49320 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49323 \begin_layout Itemize
49329 \begin_layout Itemize
49335 \begin_layout Itemize
49341 \begin_layout Itemize
49347 \begin_layout Itemize
49353 \begin_layout Itemize
49359 \begin_layout Itemize
49365 \begin_layout Itemize
49371 \begin_layout Itemize
49372 The \SpecialChar LyX
49374 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49384 \begin_layout Standard
49385 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49388 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49395 \begin_layout Bibliography
49396 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49397 LatexCommand bibitem
49404 The \SpecialChar LyX
49406 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49409 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49415 \begin_inset Newline newline
49419 \begin_inset Flex URL
49422 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49424 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49432 \begin_layout Bibliography
49433 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49434 LatexCommand bibitem
49435 key "latexcompanion"
49440 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49442 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49443 Companion Second Edition.
49446 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49449 \begin_layout Bibliography
49450 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49451 LatexCommand bibitem
49457 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49460 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49464 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49467 \begin_layout Bibliography
49468 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49469 LatexCommand bibitem
49478 : A Document Preparation System.
49481 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49484 \begin_layout Bibliography
49485 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49486 LatexCommand bibitem
49496 The \SpecialChar TeX
49500 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49503 \begin_layout Bibliography
49504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49505 LatexCommand bibitem
49511 The \SpecialChar TeX
49513 \begin_inset Newline newline
49517 \begin_inset Flex URL
49520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49522 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49530 \begin_layout Bibliography
49531 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49532 LatexCommand bibitem
49538 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49540 \begin_inset Newline newline
49544 \begin_inset Flex URL
49547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49549 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49557 \begin_layout Bibliography
49558 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49559 LatexCommand bibitem
49566 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49568 name "Documentation"
49569 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49576 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49580 \begin_inset Newline newline
49584 \begin_inset Flex URL
49587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49589 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49597 \begin_layout Bibliography
49598 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49599 LatexCommand bibitem
49606 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49608 name "Documentation"
49609 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49614 how to use the program
49616 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49620 \begin_inset Newline newline
49624 \begin_inset Flex URL
49627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49629 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49635 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49639 \begin_layout Bibliography
49641 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49642 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49643 LatexCommand bibitem
49650 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49653 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49663 \begin_inset Newline newline
49667 \begin_inset Flex URL
49670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49672 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49674 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49684 \begin_layout Bibliography
49685 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49686 LatexCommand bibitem
49693 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49695 name "Documentation"
49696 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49706 \begin_inset Newline newline
49710 \begin_inset Flex URL
49713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49715 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49723 \begin_layout Bibliography
49724 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49725 LatexCommand bibitem
49726 key "makeindex-man"
49732 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49735 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49745 \begin_inset Newline newline
49749 \begin_inset Flex URL
49752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49754 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49762 \begin_layout Bibliography
49763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49764 LatexCommand bibitem
49771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49773 name "Documentation"
49774 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49784 \begin_inset Newline newline
49788 \begin_inset Flex URL
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49793 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49801 \begin_layout Bibliography
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49803 LatexCommand bibitem
49810 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49812 name "Documentation"
49813 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49818 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49820 \begin_inset Newline newline
49824 \begin_inset Flex URL
49827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49829 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49837 \begin_layout Bibliography
49838 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49839 LatexCommand bibitem
49846 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49848 name "Documentation"
49849 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49854 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49860 \begin_inset Index idx
49863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49865 -packages ! caption
49871 \begin_inset Newline newline
49875 \begin_inset Flex URL
49878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49880 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49888 \begin_layout Bibliography
49889 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49890 LatexCommand bibitem
49897 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49899 name "Documentation"
49900 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49905 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49911 \begin_inset Index idx
49914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49916 -packages ! enumitem
49922 \begin_inset Newline newline
49926 \begin_inset Flex URL
49929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49931 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49939 \begin_layout Bibliography
49940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49941 LatexCommand bibitem
49948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49950 name "Documentation"
49951 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49956 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49962 \begin_inset Index idx
49965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49967 -packages ! fancyhdr
49973 \begin_inset Newline newline
49977 \begin_inset Flex URL
49980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49982 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49990 \begin_layout Bibliography
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49992 LatexCommand bibitem
49999 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50001 name "Documentation"
50002 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
50007 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50013 \begin_inset Index idx
50016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50018 -packages ! hyperref
50024 \begin_inset Newline newline
50028 \begin_inset Flex URL
50031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50033 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
50041 \begin_layout Bibliography
50042 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50043 LatexCommand bibitem
50050 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50052 name "Documentation"
50053 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
50058 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50064 \begin_inset Index idx
50067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50069 -packages ! nomencl
50075 \begin_inset Newline newline
50079 \begin_inset Flex URL
50082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50084 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
50092 \begin_layout Bibliography
50093 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50094 LatexCommand bibitem
50101 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50103 name "Documentation"
50104 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50109 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50115 \begin_inset Index idx
50118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50120 -packages ! prettyref
50126 \begin_inset Newline newline
50130 \begin_inset Flex URL
50133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50135 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50143 \begin_layout Bibliography
50144 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50145 LatexCommand bibitem
50152 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50154 name "Documentation"
50155 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50160 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50166 \begin_inset Index idx
50169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50171 -packages ! refstyle
50177 \begin_inset Newline newline
50181 \begin_inset Flex URL
50184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50186 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50194 \begin_layout Bibliography
50195 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50196 LatexCommand bibitem
50203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50206 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50211 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50213 \begin_inset Newline newline
50217 \begin_inset Flex URL
50220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50222 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50230 \begin_layout Bibliography
50231 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50232 LatexCommand bibitem
50239 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50242 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50247 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50249 \begin_inset Newline newline
50253 \begin_inset Flex URL
50256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50258 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50266 \begin_layout Bibliography
50267 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50268 LatexCommand bibitem
50275 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50278 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50283 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50284 for Cyrillic languages:
50285 \begin_inset Newline newline
50289 \begin_inset Flex URL
50292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50294 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50302 \begin_layout Bibliography
50303 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50304 LatexCommand bibitem
50311 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50314 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50319 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50321 \begin_inset Newline newline
50325 \begin_inset Flex URL
50328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50330 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50338 \begin_layout Bibliography
50339 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50340 LatexCommand bibitem
50347 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50350 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50355 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50357 \begin_inset Newline newline
50361 \begin_inset Flex URL
50364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50366 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50374 \begin_layout Bibliography
50375 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50376 LatexCommand bibitem
50383 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50386 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50391 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50393 \begin_inset Newline newline
50397 \begin_inset Flex URL
50400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50402 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50410 \begin_layout Bibliography
50411 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50412 LatexCommand bibitem
50419 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50422 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50427 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50429 \begin_inset Newline newline
50433 \begin_inset Flex URL
50436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50438 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50446 \begin_layout Bibliography
50447 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50448 LatexCommand bibitem
50455 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50458 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50463 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50465 \begin_inset Newline newline
50469 \begin_inset Flex URL
50472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50474 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50482 \begin_layout Bibliography
50483 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50484 LatexCommand bibitem
50491 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50494 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50499 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50501 \begin_inset Newline newline
50505 \begin_inset Flex URL
50508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50510 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50518 \begin_layout Bibliography
50519 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50520 LatexCommand bibitem
50527 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50530 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50535 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50537 \begin_inset Newline newline
50541 \begin_inset Flex URL
50544 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50546 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50554 \begin_layout Bibliography
50555 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50556 LatexCommand bibitem
50563 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50566 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50571 about new features in
50577 \begin_inset Newline newline
50581 \begin_inset Flex URL
50584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50586 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50594 \begin_layout Standard
50595 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50629 \begin_inset Note Note
50632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50639 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50640 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50641 bibliography is the second one:
50649 \begin_layout Standard
50650 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50651 LatexCommand bibtex
50652 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50653 options "biblio/alphadin"
50660 \begin_layout Standard
50661 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50665 \begin_layout Standard
50666 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50667 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50673 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50674 LatexCommand printindex